WO2015100690A1 - Higher-order coding processing method, apparatus and system - Google Patents

Higher-order coding processing method, apparatus and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015100690A1
WO2015100690A1 PCT/CN2014/000617 CN2014000617W WO2015100690A1 WO 2015100690 A1 WO2015100690 A1 WO 2015100690A1 CN 2014000617 W CN2014000617 W CN 2014000617W WO 2015100690 A1 WO2015100690 A1 WO 2015100690A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mcs
enhanced
cqi
base station
bit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2014/000617
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
陈泽为
戴博
徐俊
夏树强
李儒岳
鲁照华
左志松
Original Assignee
中兴通讯股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 中兴通讯股份有限公司 filed Critical 中兴通讯股份有限公司
Publication of WO2015100690A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015100690A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0015Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the adaptation strategy
    • H04L1/0016Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff characterised by the adaptation strategy involving special memory structures, e.g. look-up tables

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of mobile communications, and in particular, to a high-order coding processing method, apparatus, and system.
  • the uplink needs to transmit control signaling including channel state information (CSI: Channel State Information).
  • CSI Channel State Information
  • the CSI includes a Channel Quality Indication (CQI), a Pre-coding Matrix Indicator (PMI), and a Rank Indicator (RI: Rank Indicator).
  • CQI Channel Quality Indication
  • PMI Pre-coding Matrix Indicator
  • RI Rank Indicator
  • the CSI reflects the state of the downlink physical channel.
  • the base station uses CSI for downlink scheduling and performs data coding and modulation.
  • the feedback of the CSI can be periodic or non-periodic.
  • CQI is an indicator used to measure the quality of downlink channels.
  • CQI is represented by an integer value of 0 to 15, which represents different CQI levels, and different CQIs correspond to each.
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • the CQI level selected by the UE should be such that the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH: Physical Downlink Shared Channel M special transport block (TB: Transport Block) corresponding to the CQI is in the corresponding MCS. Not more than 0.1.
  • QAM represents Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
  • QPSK represents Quadrature Phase Shift Keying, which is a digital modulation method.
  • the CQI is represented by 4 bits in addition to the differential CQI.
  • the CQI bit is included in the uplink control information (UCI: Uplink Control Information).
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • the base station performs scheduling according to the CQI reported by the terminal, and determines downlink MCS index and resource allocation information.
  • the LTE protocol of Rel-8 defines a Modulation and TBS index table (hereinafter also referred to as MCS Table, MCS table).
  • the table has a total of 32 levels, basically each level corresponds to one MCS index, and each MCS index essentially corresponds to an MCS (or a spectral efficiency, note that the MCS is not limited to the MCS of Table 1).
  • the resource allocation information gives the number of physical resource blocks NPRB that the downlink transmission needs to occupy.
  • the LTE standard also provides a TBS form.
  • the transport block size (TBS: Transport block size) can be obtained given the MCS index and NPRB.
  • TBS Transport block size
  • the base station can perform coded modulation of downlink data for downlink transmission.
  • the terminal After receiving the downlink transmission data, the terminal needs to obtain the MCS index of the downlink transmission and the demodulation decoding of the TBS for the data.
  • the base station transmits downlink control information, including a 5-bit MCS index, and a resource allocation location, by using a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH: Physical Downlink Control Channel) in a specific DCI (Downlink Control Information) format (DCI format).
  • PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel
  • DCI format Downlink Control Information format
  • the DCI format includes the following types: DCI format O, DCI format 1, DCI format 1A, DCI format 1B, DCI format 1C, DCI format 1D, DCI format 2, DCI format 2A, DCI format 2B, DCI format 2C, DCI format 2D , DCI format 3 and DCI format 3A, etc.
  • the LTE system After experiencing several versions of Rel-8/9/10/11, the LTE system has been researching R12 technology.
  • the uplink and downlink support up to 64QAM modulation and coding.
  • small cells require higher data transmission rates and higher system spectral efficiency, and require higher order modulation coding, such as 256 QAM.
  • Existing standards cannot meet this need.
  • the conventional table of the LTE standard that is, the CQI table/MCS table/TBS table supports up to 64 QAM modulation coding mode and spectral efficiency of about 5.5547 bits/s/Hz.
  • the conventional table ie, the existing CQI table, the MCS table, the TBS table
  • the high-order modulation mode is introduced in the communication system, such as 256 QAM and 1024QAM
  • MCS table, TBS table There are two design schemes:
  • the enhanced table size of the MCS level including the high-order modulation mode of the first scheme is equal to the regular table size.
  • the new CQI table and the MCS table are 16 and 32 levels respectively;
  • the enhanced table size including the high-order modulation mode MCS level is larger than the conventional table.
  • the new CQI table and the MCS table are 32 and 64 levels, respectively.
  • the larger the table the larger the spectral efficiency range that can be covered, or the higher the spectral efficiency granularity; but the more bits needed to represent the table.
  • the following LTE system introduces the design of the new CQI table after 256QAM as an example.
  • the spectral efficiency range covered by the new CQI table and the spectral efficiency granularity are a pair of contradictions.
  • the new CQI table/MCS table can completely cover the minimum spectral efficiency in the existing table and the frequency efficiency range limited by the highest frequency efficiency of 256 QAM without affecting the spectral efficiency granularity, but increase The number of CQI bits needs to consider the problem of increased UCI payload and degraded UCI demodulation performance. Similarly, similar problems exist with the new MCS table approach.
  • the conventional table of the communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode, and does not solve the problem of the configuration use of the specific high-order modulation enhancement table and the regular table. Therefore, current communication systems cannot support higher order modulation methods. In scenes where channel conditions are better and higher order modulation schemes may be applied, such as Small Cell scenarios, the peak data transmission rate and the efficiency of the system spectrum are limited.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method, device and system, which solves the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode.
  • a high-order code modulation processing method includes:
  • the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station is in a predefined resource.
  • the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table supporting the M-order modulation mode and/or Or the MCS table and/or the TBS table, the conventional table is preferably not supported by M, and the method further includes:
  • the base station configures other signaling on the other resource set except the predefined resource set, and/or the terminal in other transmission modes except the predefined transmission mode, where the other configuration signaling indicates selection support.
  • the predefined set of resources includes at least one of the following:
  • the predefined set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
  • the set of subframes configured by the base station includes at least one of the following:
  • Subframe set 0 subframe set 0
  • subframe set 1 Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network, MBSFN
  • enhanced collision management service enhanced Interference Management
  • Traffic Adaptation elMTA
  • SIB1 system message block 1
  • TDD Time Division Duplexing
  • the fixed set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
  • the special subframe is configured with one or more of the configured Downlink Pilot Time Slots (DwPTSs) of 0, 1, 9, and 9.
  • DwPTSs Downlink Pilot Time Slots
  • the method further includes at least one of the following:
  • the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 1, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 0, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station For the DL subframe set switched by the UL subframe in the TDD DL subframe in the elMTA and the downlink subframe set configured by the System Message Block 1 (SIB1) message, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or Regular tables with M-order modulation are not supported.
  • SIB1 System Message Block 1
  • the predefined set of frequency domain resources includes resources in the spectrum resources that are not interfered by X2 signaling and may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations.
  • the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode
  • the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation scheme or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation scheme.
  • the subset of the predefined downlink antenna port set includes at least one of the following:
  • the predefined set of transport layer numbers is a set of all positive integers satisfying 1 ⁇ rank ⁇ , where rank is the number of transport layers, that is, the elements of the set of transport layer numbers, which are M-order modulation modes.
  • rank is the number of transport layers, that is, the elements of the set of transport layer numbers, which are M-order modulation modes.
  • the predefined transmission manner includes at least one of the following:
  • the non-spatial multiplexing transmission method includes at least one of the following:
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station receives channel state information of the terminal, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and the UCI field of the channel state information carries information indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table.
  • the base station selects and configures an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode: for the number of transmission layers rank ⁇ L, the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation mode. , and L is a positive integer;
  • the CQI is based on a conventional CQI table.
  • the base station indicates, by using the configuration signaling, that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, and the terminal reports the CQI of the two transport blocks
  • the CQIs of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced CQI table.
  • the CQI of only one of the two transport blocks is based on an enhanced CQI table.
  • the method includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, when the terminal reports the CQI, it is notified by the 1 bit of the second transport block differential CQI that the CQI of the first and/or second transport block of the base station is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table.
  • the second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI;
  • the terminal When the number of transmission layers is >1, for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI and does not report the PMI, when the terminal reports the CQI, the terminal adds the 1 bit added to the UCI domain to notify the base station, and the first transmission block Whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a conventional CQI table,
  • the terminal notifying the base station of the second transport block by another bit added by the UCI domain, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
  • the terminal notifies the base station by using a PTI field of channel state information, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
  • the enhanced CQI table is a 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI ⁇ is represented by 5 bits;
  • the CQI of the first or two transport blocks is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table, the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits; the second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI ;
  • the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
  • the CQI of two transport blocks is jointly reported by 7 bits, that is, any of the 27 cases that 7 bits can represent indicates a combination of two transport blocks CQI;
  • the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI of the first transport block is used.
  • 5 bits indicate that the CQI of the second transport block is represented by a 4-bit differential CQI; the terminal notifies the base station by the PTI field of the channel state information, the CQI being based on sets A and B in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, the set A
  • the element of B or B comes from the level in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
  • the method includes at least one of the following:
  • a new 1 bit is added to inform the base station, and the subband CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table;
  • the wideband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table and is represented by 5 bits;
  • the subband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and is represented by X bits, the X > 3 and being a positive integer;
  • the base station further includes:
  • the base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least a modulation and coding mode domain (/ MCS ), a DCI domain that passes the downlink control signaling, or a temporary identifier of a cell wireless network (Cell Radio) Network Temporaryl dentifier, C-RNTI) notifying the terminal that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, the DCI domain including at least the following new data indicator field, pilot quality indicator (Pilot) Quality Indicator, PQI), Redundancy Version, Transmit Power Control (TPC) command.
  • / MCS modulation and coding mode domain
  • C-RNTI Cell Radio Network Temporaryl dentifier
  • the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table, where L is the M-order modulation mode supported by the number of transmission layers, rank ⁇ L.
  • the maximum number of transmission layers, and L is a positive integer; for rank > L, the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table.
  • the method further includes at least one of the following:
  • the / MCS of both transport blocks are based on the enhanced MCS table;
  • the / MCS of one transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table, and the other transport block/
  • the MCS is based on a conventional MCS table;
  • the / MCS of the transport block is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table.
  • the method further includes at least one of the following:
  • the base station When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station notifies the terminal of the first transmission block and/or by 1 bit in the first transmission block modulation and coding mode domain.
  • the base station uses the PQI to inform the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table, and the upper layer configures the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI.
  • Table, or PQI is only used to indicate an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table and no longer indicates PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
  • the base station uses the TPC command to notify the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table.
  • the TPC command indicates the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table while indicating the TPC;
  • the /MCS of a single transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which is indicated by the new data of the second transport block ( New data indicator) 1 bit of the field and the first transmission block modulation and coding mode i or 5 bits;
  • the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are modulated and encoded by another transport block.
  • 1 bit and 1st block of the transport block are composed of 5 bits of the modulation and coding mode field, and the remaining 4 bits of the modulation and coding mode field of the other transport block are used as the difference / MCS with respect to the first transport block, that is, another transmission / MCS with the I-th / MCS differential / MCS transport block summing block;
  • the / MCS of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, and the / MCS of the two transport blocks uses 10 bits. Joint reporting, that is, any one of the 10 tenths of 2 that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks/ MCS ;
  • the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which is represented by the first transport block redundancy version.
  • the /MCS of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and are represented by 6 bits.
  • the 6 bits are all
  • the terminal is notified using PQI, the / MCS is based on enhanced 6 bits
  • the set A or B in the MCS table the elements of the set A or B are from the level in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table.
  • the upper layer configures the indication set A or B in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI, or the PQI is only used to indicate the set A or B and no longer indicates the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
  • the elements of the set A or B are from the level in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and A And B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table, specifically, the TPC command indicates the set A or B while indicating the TPC;
  • the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table; when the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using a pre-configured C-RNTI plus or minus j, / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table.
  • the embodiment of the invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing method, including:
  • the terminal receives the downlink data, and obtains configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the configuration signaling indicates that the downlink
  • An enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode is selected on the defined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or a conventional table indicating that the M-order modulation mode is not supported, M > 256 and is a positive integer.
  • the terminal after receiving the downlink data, the acquiring the base station on the predefined resource set, and/or the signaling configured to the terminal by the predefined transmission mode, the terminal further includes:
  • the terminal notifies the base station that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table through a UCI field of channel state information.
  • the terminal further includes:
  • the terminal receives the downlink control signaling sent by the base station, where the downlink control signaling includes at least /MCS, and the terminal learns that the / MCS is enhanced based on the DCI domain or the C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling.
  • the MCS table or the regular MCS table, the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
  • New data indicates the domain, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing device, where the device includes: a first configuration module, configured to: send configuration signaling to a terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station is in a predefined resource Selecting an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode on the set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selecting a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table supporting the M-order modulation mode and/or Or MCS table and / or TBS table, as described
  • M > 256 and is a positive integer.
  • the device further comprises:
  • a second configuration module configured to: the other resource set except the predefined resource set.
  • the other configuration signaling indicates that an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode is selected or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode is selected.
  • the device further comprises:
  • a channel state information receiving module configured to: receive channel state information of the terminal,
  • the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and the UCI domain of the channel state information carries information indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table.
  • the device further comprises:
  • a control signaling sending module configured to: send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and notify the terminal by using a DCI domain or a C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling
  • the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
  • New data indicator field PQI
  • redundancy version field TPC command.
  • the embodiment of the invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing device, including:
  • Configuring a signaling acquiring module configured to receive downlink data, and obtain configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the configuration signaling indicates that the M-th order modulation mode is selected to be supported on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode.
  • the enhanced table or indication selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, M ⁇ 256 and is a positive integer.
  • the device further comprises:
  • a channel state information sending module configured to: send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, notify, by the UCI domain of the channel state information, that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or Conventional CQI table.
  • the device further comprises:
  • a control signaling receiving module configured to: receive downlink control signaling sent by the base station, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling is used to learn the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
  • New data indicates the domain, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing system, including a base station and a terminal, where the base station includes the high-order code modulation processing device described above, and is configured to be to the terminal.
  • the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table supporting an M-order modulation mode, which is a conventional CQI table and/or an MCS table that does not support the M-order modulation mode.
  • TBS table M ⁇ 256 and is a positive integer;
  • the terminal including the high-order code modulation processing device as described above, is configured to receive downlink data, and obtain the configuration signaling sent by the base station.
  • the base station is further configured to: in addition to a predefined resource set, the other configuration signaling indicates that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the M-order modulation mode is not selected. Regular form.
  • the terminal is further configured to: send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and notify, by the UCI domain of the channel state information, that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI.
  • Table or regular CQI table ;
  • the base station is further configured to receive channel state information sent by the terminal.
  • the base station is further configured to send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and notify the terminal by using a DCI domain or a C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling.
  • the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
  • New data indicator field PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command
  • the terminal is further configured to receive the downlink control signaling.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also provide a computer program, including program instructions, that when executed by a base station, cause the base station to perform the above method.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also provide a carrier carrying the above computer program.
  • the embodiment of the invention further provides a computer program, comprising program instructions, when the program instruction is executed by the terminal, so that the terminal can execute the above method.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also provide a carrier carrying the above computer program.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method, apparatus, and system, where a base station sends configuration signaling to a terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station is on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission.
  • an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode or a conventional table not supporting the M-order modulation mode is selected, and the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table supporting the M-th order modulation mode.
  • the conventional table is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table that does not support the M-order modulation mode.
  • FIG. 1 is a flow chart of a high-order code modulation processing method according to Embodiment 22 of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a high-order code modulation processing apparatus according to Embodiment 23 of the present invention.
  • Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing still another structure of a high-order code modulation processing device according to a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention.
  • the conventional table of the communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode, and the specific high-order modulation mode enhancement table and the configuration of the regular table are not solved. For example, when to configure the enhanced table of the high-order modulation mode, what kind of situation Use a regular form.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method, apparatus, and system.
  • the base station sends configuration signaling to a terminal, indicating that the base station is on a predefined resource set and/or in advance.
  • the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS supporting the M-order modulation mode. Table, the conventional table is not supported.
  • the 256QAM new table involved in the embodiment of the present invention includes a new CQI supporting 256QAM and MCS and TBS tables; existing protocol forms include CQI and MCS and TBS tables for existing protocols.
  • Embodiments 1 to 8 are configuration examples on the base station side.
  • Embodiment 1 The embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the base station configures the use of a 256QAM enhanced table or regular form on a predefined set of resources.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 1 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 0, where the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM;
  • the base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 2 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM for the subframe set 1.
  • the conventional table is a CQI table of the LTE Rel-11 version standard 36.213, an MCS table and TBS table.
  • the method configures a 256QAM table on a high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on a low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby implementing adaptive coding modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the base station sends a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 1, the enhanced table is a CQI table and an MCS table supporting 256QAM;
  • the set 0 configuration parameter, the subframe set 0 selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM, which is the CQI table and the MCS table of the LTE Rel-11 version standard 36.213.
  • the method configures 256QAM on the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 1 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode for the subframe set 0, the enhanced table is a CQI table supporting 256QAM;
  • the base station does not configure the subframe set 1 Parameter, subframe set 1 selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM, which is an LTE Rel-11 version protocol CQI table of 36.213.
  • the method configures the use of 256QAM on the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 1 and a parameter 2 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 0 and the subframe set 1, respectively, and the enhanced table is an MCS table supporting 256QAM.
  • the method configures 256QAM on the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • Sub-Embodiment 5 This embodiment 4 determines the following scenario: between Donor eNodeB and Relay node
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the base station receives relatively narrowband transmit power (RTP) signaling sent by the neighboring cell through the X2 interface.
  • RTP transmit power
  • the base station selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM on the frequency domain resource with large interference, and selects an enhanced table that supports 256QAM on the frequency domain resource with less interference.
  • the method configures the use of 256QAM on the frequency domain resources of the high-signal-to-noise ratio, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the frequency-domain resources of the low-signal-to-noise ratio, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system frequency efficiency. .
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table not supporting 256QAM is configured for a predetermined antenna port.
  • the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM on antenna ports 5, 7-14, and configures a regular table that does not support 256QAM on other antenna ports.
  • the scheme supports 256QAM for DMRS-based downlink transmission configuration. Enhanced forms or regular forms that do not support 256QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 This embodiment configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for antenna ports 0-3, 5, 7-14.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for a predetermined set of transport layer numbers.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted by configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM.
  • the modulation and coding mode field and/or the reported CQI are based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when rank > 2, the modulation and coding mode field and/or the reported CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM.
  • Ranks greater than 2 do not use 256 QAM because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 2, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table that supports 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM.
  • the modulation and coding mode field and/or the upper CQI is based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when the rank > 4 modulation and coding mode field and/or reporting CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table that supports 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM.
  • the modulation and coding mode field and/or the upper CQI is based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when rank > 6 modulation and coding mode fields and/or reporting CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 4 the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM.
  • the modulation and coding mode field and/or the upper CQI is based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when rank > 7 modulation and coding mode fields and/or reporting CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 7, because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 7, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • different CSI processes can independently configure an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM through configuration signaling.
  • the regular table is used to better achieve adaptive code modulation and improve system spectral efficiency.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the base station configures the use of the 256QAM enhanced table or the existing protocol regular table for the terminal in the predetermined downlink transmission mode.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the base station configures a 256QAM enhanced table or an existing protocol table for the spatial multiplexing transmission mode by using a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling); Let the configuration, non-spatial multiplexing transmission use a regular table.
  • the scheme mainly considers the use of spatial multiplexing transmission mode and 256 QAM to improve peak rate and spectrum efficiency when channel conditions are good.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 In this embodiment, the base station configures the 256QAM enhanced table or the use of the existing protocol table for the spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing transmission modes through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted by configuration signaling). This configuration mainly considers to broaden the application scenario of 256 QAM as much as possible, improve the peak rate, and improve system throughput.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 In this embodiment, the base station configures a 256QAM enhanced table or an existing protocol table for the DMRS-based transmission mode by using a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling), and does not pass the signaling configuration for the non-DMRS transmission mode.
  • Non-DMRS transmission methods use regular forms.
  • the scheme considers the DMRS-based transmission method to have the following advantages:
  • the interference between the DMRS is small, and the channel estimation based on the DMRS is more accurate; for the DMRS transmission mode, the selection of the codebook is more flexible. Therefore, for DMRS-based transmission, the transmission block can obtain a higher signal-to-noise ratio, which is more suitable for the use of 256 QAM.
  • the CRS-based transmission method has the problem of interference between CRS and data, which affects channel estimation accuracy.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for a predetermined downlink transmission mode.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for a transmission mode other than the transmission mode 1/2/6 through a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling); Mode 1/2/6 uses a regular table that does not support 256QAM and does not need to be configured through the base station.
  • This configuration is equivalent to configuring the 256QAM enhanced table or the existing protocol table only for the spatial multiplexing downlink transmission mode.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for the transmission mode 7-10 through the high-level configuration parameter (transmitted through configuration signaling); the other transmission mode uses the 256QAM that does not support 256QAM. Regular forms, and do not need to be configured through the base station.
  • This configuration is equivalent to an enhanced table that supports 256QAM only for DMRS-based downlink transmission configuration or a regular table that does not support 256QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 This embodiment configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for all transmission modes by configuration signaling. This configuration mainly considers to broaden the application scenario of 256 QAM as much as possible, improve the peak rate, and improve system throughput.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the base station supports an enhanced table of 256QAM for a predetermined DCI format configuration or does not support Regular form of 256QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table not supporting 256QAM in five formats of DCI format 2/2A/2B/2C/2D through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling).
  • Other DCI formats use regular tables that do not support 256QAM and are not configured through high-level parameters.
  • the above DCI format indicates a MIMO type PDSCH transmission, and a 256QAM enhanced table is selected for the DCI format, and the peak rate and the spectrum efficiency can be improved by using MIMO and 256 QAM in a better channel condition.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for DCI formatl/lX/2/2X through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling); other DCI formats are not used. Supports regular tables of 256QAM and does not pass high-level parameter configuration.
  • DCI format IX represents any combination of DCI format 1A/1B/1C/1D; can be used to indicate various manners of PDSCH transmission, select 256QAM enhanced table for the DCI format, and can broaden the application scenario of 256 QAM as much as possible Increase peak rate and spectral efficiency and increase system throughput.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM in four formats of DCI formatl/2B/2C/2D through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted by configuration signaling); other DCI
  • the format uses a regular table that does not support 256QAM and is not configured through high-level parameters.
  • This configuration is equivalent to configuring an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table not supporting 256QAM for DMRS-based downlink transmission.
  • Embodiments 9 to 13 are scheduling embodiments on the base station side:
  • the base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least a modulation and coding mode field (/ MCS ).
  • / MCS modulation and coding mode field
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the base station sends RRC signaling to the terminal, configures a 256 QAM enhanced table, and assumes that the maximum number of downlink transmission layers that 256QAM can support is 6.
  • the base stations based on / MCS and downlink transmission resources
  • the number of blocks of the NPRB is enhanced to obtain the TBS of the downlink transmission, and the TBS is used for code modulation and transmission, and the downlink data is transmitted.
  • Rank > 6 the base station obtains the downlink transmission according to the / MCS and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks N PRB.
  • the TBS uses TBS for code modulation and transmits downlink data.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the inter-layer interference is larger when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the base station configures a 256 QAM enhanced table through RRC signaling, and assumes that the maximum downlink transmission layer that 256QAM can support is 8. Then, for the number of transmission layers rank ⁇ 8, / MCS is based on the 256 QAM enhancement table, the base station obtains the TBS of the downlink transmission according to the enhanced TBS table of the / MCS and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks N PRB , performs coding modulation using the TBS, and transmits the downlink data.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 This embodiment assumes two layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and RRC signaling configures a 256 QAM enhanced table.
  • the / MCS of both transport blocks is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table. This scheme is used to improve spectral efficiency when the signal-to-noise ratio is good.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 This embodiment assumes eight layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and RRC signaling is configured.
  • the / MCS of the first transport block is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table, the / MCS of the second transport block is based on a regular table; or the / MCS of the second transport block is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table, the / MCS of the first transport block is based Regular form.
  • the scheme considers that two transport blocks may have different SINRs and should determine whether to use a table supporting 256QAM, respectively.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 This embodiment assumes a two-layer transmission of one transport block, and RRC signaling configures a 256 QAM enhanced table. Use 256 QAM enhanced tables for this transport block. This scheme is used to improve spectral efficiency when the signal-to-noise ratio is good.
  • Sub-Embodiment 4 This embodiment assumes a single layer transmission of a transport block, and RRC signaling configures a 256 QAM enhanced table. However, the 256 QAM enhanced table is not used for this transport block. This scheme does not need to use an enhanced table supporting 256QAM when the signal-to-noise ratio condition is poor.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Ath Embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2D, and the base station passes the RRC.
  • the signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables.
  • the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 2 and set 3 corresponding to the upper layer configuration PQI use the 256 QAM enhanced table.
  • the base station notifies the terminal through the PQI, and the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table.
  • PQI 10 or 11
  • the scheme reuses the PQI bit to implement dynamic indication of the MCS table, which can better implement adaptive code modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
  • the base station notifies the terminal through the second transport block new data indication field, and the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table.
  • the new data indicates that the field is equal to 1
  • / MCS is based on the enhanced 5-bit MCS table, which is equal to 0 based on the regular MCS table.
  • the scheme reuses the new data indicating domain to implement dynamic indication of the MCS table, which can better implement adaptive coding modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2A and rank > 1, and the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration.
  • the base station reuses the 1-bit notification terminal in the modulation and coding mode domain of the second transport block, and the two transport blocks are/ MCS based on the enhanced 5-bit MCS table or the regular MCS table.
  • the method can realize the dynamic indication of the MCS table without increasing the load of the DCI format 2/2X, and the adaptive code modulation can be better realized.
  • Sub-Embodiment 4 the base station semi-statically configures a table supporting 256 QAM through RRC signaling.
  • the base station uses 1 bit of the first codeword redundancy version field 2 bits to indicate that the first codeword/ MCS is based on an enhanced 5-bit MCS table or a regular table; using the second codeword redundancy version field 2
  • the 1 bit in the bit is used to indicate whether the second codeword/ MCS is based on an enhanced 5-bit MCS table or a regular table.
  • the RRC configuration does not support 256QAM
  • the DCI domain is interpreted according to the existing protocol. This method can realize the dynamic coding of the MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X, and can realize adaptive code modulation better.
  • Sub-Embodiment 5 In this embodiment, the base station semi-statically configures a table supporting 256 QAM through RRC signaling.
  • the base station uses the TPC command to inform the terminal that the / MCS is based on an enhanced 5-bit MCS table or a regular table.
  • This method implements the MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X. Dynamic indication, better adaptive code modulation can be achieved.
  • Embodiment 12 An embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2D, and the base station semi-statically configures a table supporting 256 QAM through RRC signaling.
  • the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 0 and set 1 corresponding to the upper layer configuration PQI use the 256 QAM enhancement table; the base station notifies the terminal through the PQI, and the / MCS is based on the first 32 or the last 32 levels of the 256 QAM 6-bit MCS table.
  • the scheme reuses the PQI bit to implement the indication of the 6-bit MCS table.
  • the table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better implement adaptive code modulation; and does not increase the downlink
  • the base station uses the new data of the second transport block to indicate that the 1 bit in the field is combined with the 5-bit modulation and coding mode field of the first transport block to indicate a 6-bit MCS enhanced table supporting 256 QAM.
  • the method configures a 6-bit new MCS table, which has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better implement adaptive coding modulation; and does not increase the load of DCI format 2/2X.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2A and rank > 1, and the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration.
  • the base station reuses the 1-bit modulation and coding mode field of the second transport block in combination with the 5-bit modulation and coding mode field of the first transport block to indicate a 6-bit new MCS table supporting 256QAM, and a modulation scheme of the second transport block.
  • the / MCS is based on a 6-bit or 5-bit new MCS table.
  • the method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of the DCI format 2/2X.
  • the table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, and the adaptive code modulation can be better realized.
  • Sub-Embodiment 4 This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2 and rank > 1.
  • the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration.
  • First and second transport blocks /MCS is based on an enhanced 6-bit MCS table.
  • the / MCS of the two transport blocks is jointly reported with 10 bits, that is, any of the 10 tenths of the 2 bits that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of the two transport blocks/MCS.
  • the method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of the DCI format 2/2X.
  • the table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, and the adaptive code modulation can be better realized.
  • Sub-Embodiment 5 reuses the redundancy version field in the DCI in the case where the RRC signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables: Modulation and coding mode field of the first codeword 5 bits combined with the codeword redundancy 1 bit in the version field 2 bits is used to indicate a 6-bit MCS table, the MCS of the first codeword is based on a 6-bit new MCS table; the modulation and coding mode of the second codeword is 5 bits combined with the codeword redundancy version One bit of the field indicates a 6-bit MCS table, and the MCS of the second codeword is based on a 6-bit new MCS table. Another bit of the redundancy version field is used to indicate retransmission of version 0 or 2.
  • the DCI domain is interpreted according to the existing protocol.
  • This method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X.
  • This table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better achieve adaptive code modulation.
  • Sub-Embodiment 6 reuses the redundancy version field in the DCI in the case where the RRC signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables: Modulation and coding mode field of the first codeword 5 bits combined with the codeword redundancy 1 bit in the version field 2 bits is used to indicate the 6-bit MCS table, the MCS of the first codeword is based on the 6-bit new MCS table; the modulation and coding mode of the second codeword is 5 bits combined with the first codeword redundancy The aforementioned bits of the remaining version field indicate a 6-bit MCS table, and the MCS of the second codeword is based on a 6-bit new MCS table.
  • the first codeword redundancy version field is used to indicate the retransmission of version 0 or 2.
  • the DCI domain is interpreted according to the existing protocol. This method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X. This table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better achieve adaptive coding modulation.
  • Sub-Embodiment 7 This embodiment informs the terminal that the / MCS is based on the first 32 or the last 32 levels in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table using the TPC command in the case where the RRC signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables.
  • the scheme implements an indication of a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of the downlink control information.
  • the table has a finer granularity of granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, and the adaptive coding modulation can be better realized.
  • Sub-third embodiment The embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 In this embodiment, the base station sends RRC signaling to the terminal, and configures a 256 QAM enhanced table, and assumes that the maximum downlink transmission layer supported by 256QAM is 6.
  • the CQI When the number of layers is level 6, the CQI is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table; when Rank > 6, it is based on a regular table.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the rank interference is greater when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the base station sends RRC signaling to the terminal, and configures a 256 QAM enhanced table, and assumes that the maximum downlink transmission layer supported by 256QAM is 4.
  • the CQI is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table; when Rank > 4, it is based on a regular table.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Embodiments 14 to 17 are feedback embodiments of the base station side: The base station receives channel state information of the terminal, and the channel state information includes at least CQI.
  • Embodiment 14 Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. This embodiment reports CSI for the period.
  • the terminal For periodic reporting of UCI, the terminal notifies the base station by adding 1 bit to the UCI domain, and the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table.
  • the bit is equal to 0
  • the CQI is based on a conventional 4-bit CQI table, and when equal to 1, is based on a 4-bit enhanced CQI table supporting 256QAM.
  • the scheme implements dynamic indication of the CQI table, which can better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not affect the demodulation performance of the UCI.
  • the bit is equal to 0
  • the CQI is based on a conventional 4-bit CQI table, and when equal to 1, is based on a 4-bit enhanced CQI table supporting 256QAM.
  • the second The transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI.
  • the scheme implements the dynamic indication of the CQI table, can better indicate the channel condition, and provides a reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load, and does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
  • the base station, the CQI of the two transport blocks is based on an enhanced CQI table or a conventional CQI table.
  • the bit is equal to 0, the CQI is based on a conventional 4-bit CQI table, and when equal to 1, is based on a 4-bit enhanced CQI table supporting 256QAM.
  • the scheme implements a dynamic indication of the CQI table, which can better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
  • Sub-Embodiment 4 In this embodiment, it is assumed that the downlink transmission mode 10 is configured with 8 antenna transmissions and R C signaling is configured with 256 QAMs.
  • the terminal uses the PTI dynamic indication to support the 256QAM CQI table or the regular CQI table.
  • Embodiment 15 An embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method. This embodiment is directed to "3 ⁇ 4 CSI" on the cycle.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM and rank > 1.
  • the CQI of the first codeword is based on a 5-bit CQI table, which is reported by 5 bits
  • the second codeword CQI is based on a 5-bit or 4-bit new CQI table supporting 256 QAM, or an existing protocol CQI table, Reported using a 2-bit differential CQI.
  • the scheme uses a 5-bit CQI table to make the CQI have a finer code rate granularity, better indicate the channel condition, and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load.
  • PUCCH reporting type 1 PUCCH report type 1
  • the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are all based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
  • the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits, and the CQI of the second transport block is represented by a 4-bit differential CQI.
  • the scheme adds a 2-bit CQI report that supports two codewords respectively, and uses a 5-bit CQI table to make the CQI have a finer code rate granularity, better indicating the channel condition, and providing a reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; And does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
  • the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
  • the CQI of the first transport block and the second transport block is represented by 7 bits, that is, any one of the 7th powers of 2 that can be represented by 7 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks CQI. .
  • the 5-bit CQI table is used to make the CQI have a more refined code rate granularity, better indicate the channel condition, and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load, and does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
  • Sub-Embodiment 5 In this embodiment, it is assumed that the downlink transmission mode 10 configures 8 antenna transmission and RRC signaling configures 256 QAM.
  • the terminal notifies the base station using the PTI, which is based on the first 16 or the last 16 levels of the 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM.
  • the scheme uses a 5-bit CQI table to make the CQI have a finer code rate granularity, better indicate the channel condition, and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM.
  • the CQI table of the wideband CQI is a 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM, and the CQI is reported by 5 bits;
  • the CQI table of the sub-band CQI is a 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM, and the CQI is reported by 3 bits.
  • the scheme considers that for the aperiodic CQI reporting, the uplink time-frequency resources are not so scarce.
  • the CQI table of 5 bits can be used and the CQI can be reported by 1 bit to better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM.
  • Embodiment 17 An embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 This embodiment assumes two layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and the base station configures 256 QAM through RRC signaling. The CQI reporting of both transport blocks is based on a table that supports 256 QAM. The scheme is used to better indicate the channel condition when the signal to noise ratio condition is good, and provides a reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 This embodiment assumes eight layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and the base station configures 256 QAM through RRC signaling.
  • the CQI of the first transport block is based on a new CQI table supporting 256 QAM
  • the second transport block is based on the CQI table of the existing protocol
  • the CQI of the first transport block is based on the existing protocol CQI table
  • the second transport block is based on Support for new CQI forms for 256QAM.
  • the scheme considers that two codewords may have different SINRs, and not all of them need to use a table that supports 256QAM.
  • Embodiments 18 to 21 are terminal side embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the terminal receives the high-level configuration parameter 1 sent by the base station, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 0, where the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM;
  • Configuration parameter 2 which selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM for subframe set 1, which is a CQI table, an MCS table and a TBS table of the LTE Rel-11 version standard 36.213.
  • the / MCS received in the subframe set 0 is based on the enhanced table of the base station configuration, the CQI of the fed back subframe set 0 is based on the enhanced table configured by the base station; the / MCS received in the subframe set 1 is based on the regular table configured by the base station, The CQI of the fed back subframe set 1 is based on a regular table of base station configurations.
  • the method configures a 256QAM table on a high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on a low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the terminal receives the high-level configuration parameter sent by the base station, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode for the subframe set 0, where the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM.
  • the / MCS received by the terminal in subframe set 0 is based on an enhanced table configured by the base station, and the CQI of the fed back subframe set 0 is based on an enhanced table configured by the base station;
  • the / CMS received in subframe set 1 is based on a conventional table of base station configurations, and the CQI of the fed back subframe set 1 is based on a conventional table of base station configurations.
  • the method configures the use of 256QAM in the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1.
  • the terminal receives a high-level configuration parameter sent by the base station, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode for the subframe set 1.
  • the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM.
  • the / MCS received in the subframe set 1 is based on the enhanced table of the base station configuration, the CQI of the fed back subframe set 1 is based on the enhanced table configured by the base station; the / MCS received in the subframe set 0 is based on the regular table configured by the base station, The CQI of the fed back subframe set 0 is based on a regular table of base station configurations.
  • the method configures the use of 256QAM in the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling uses the 256 QAM enhanced table for the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 2 and set 3, and selects the use of the 256 QAM for the set 0 and set 1 Regular form.
  • the terminal receives downlink control information sent by the base station, including the PQI.
  • the scheme reuses the PQI bit to implement dynamic indication of the MCS table, which can better implement adaptive code modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
  • Embodiment 20 Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 2.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks WPRB by de-DCI.
  • the / MCS is based on the MCS table enhanced by 256 QAM, and the terminal is enhanced according to / MCS and NPRB.
  • the TBS table gets the TBS; when the rank > 2 is based on the regular table, The terminal acquires the TBS according to the regular TBS table of the /MCS and WPRB.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 2 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 2, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 4.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks WPRB by de-DCI.
  • the / MCS is based on the 256 QAM enhanced MCS table, and the terminal is enhanced according to the /MCS and WPRB.
  • the TBS table acquires the TBS; when rank > 4, based on the regular table, the terminal acquires the TBS according to the /MCS and WPRB check conventional TBS tables.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 6.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks NPRB by de-DCI.
  • the / MCS is based on the 256 QAM enhanced MCS table, and the terminal is enhanced according to the /MCS and WPRB.
  • the TBS table acquires the TBS; when rank > 6, based on the regular table, the terminal acquires the TBS according to the /MCS and WPRB check conventional TBS tables.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the inter-layer interference is larger when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
  • Sub-Embodiment 1 the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 2.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers by solving the DCI.
  • the terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least CQI.
  • the CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 2, it is based on the regular CQI table.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 2 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 2, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 2 the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured A 256 QAM enhancement table is placed, and the maximum number of downlink transmission layers that 256QAM can support is four.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank by deciding the DCI.
  • the terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least a CQI.
  • the CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 4, it is based on the conventional CQI table.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-Embodiment 3 the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 6.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers by solving the DCI.
  • the terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least CQI.
  • CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 6, it is based on the regular CQI table.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the rank interference is greater when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • Sub-invention 4 In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 7.
  • the terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers by solving the DCI.
  • the terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least CQI.
  • CQI When the number of transmission layers is rank ⁇ 7, CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 7, it is based on the regular CQI table.
  • 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 7, because the rank interference is greater when rank is greater than 7, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method, and the process of using the method to complete high-order code modulation processing is as shown in FIG. 1 , which includes:
  • Step 101 The base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal.
  • the configuration signaling sent by the base station indicates that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode.
  • the enhanced table is an enhanced support for the M-order modulation mode.
  • the CQI table and/or the MCS table and/or the TBS table which is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, M ⁇ 256 and is a positive integer.
  • the base station configures other signaling on the other resource set except the predefined resource set, and/or the terminal in other transmission modes except the predefined transmission mode, where the other configuration signaling indication Select an enhanced table that supports M-order modulation or a regular table that does not support M-order modulation.
  • the base station may also indicate, on a set of resources other than the predefined set of resources, to select a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode.
  • the predefined set of resources includes at least one of the following:
  • the predefined set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
  • the subframe set configured by the base station includes at least one of the following:
  • Subframe set 0 (subframe set 0), subframe set 1 (MB set), MBSFN sub-frame, for elMTA, downlink subframe set configured by system message block 1 (SIB1), in TDD DL subframe in elMTA
  • SIB1 system message block 1
  • the fixed set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
  • one or more of the special subframe configurations 0, 1 , ..., 9 are configured.
  • the base station For the subframe set 0 and the subframe set 1, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 1, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 0, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
  • the base station For the DL subframe set switched by the UL subframe in the TDD DL subframe in the elMTA and the downlink subframe set configured by the System Message Block 1 (SIB1) message, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or Regular tables with M-order modulation are not supported.
  • SIB1 System Message Block 1
  • the predefined set of frequency domain resources includes resources in the spectrum resources that are not interfered by X2 signaling and may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations.
  • the base station selects a configuration table that does not support the M-order modulation mode
  • the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation scheme or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation scheme.
  • the subset of the predefined set of downlink antenna ports includes at least one of the following:
  • the predefined set of transport layer numbers is a set of all positive integers satisfying 1 ⁇ rank ⁇ , where rank is the number of transport layers, that is, the elements of the set of transport layer numbers, which are the maximum transmission supported by the M-order modulation mode.
  • rank is the number of transport layers, that is, the elements of the set of transport layer numbers, which are the maximum transmission supported by the M-order modulation mode.
  • the number of layers and is a positive integer.
  • the predefined transmission mode includes at least one of the following: Spatial multiplexing transmission method;
  • the non-spatial multiplexing transmission method includes at least one of the following:
  • Step 102 The terminal receives downlink data, and acquires configuration signaling sent by the base station.
  • the terminal determines, according to the configuration signaling, a table selected by the base station on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode.
  • the pre-installed convention such as: using the same modulation processing method as the base station, the modulation processing is performed, or a different modulation processing method is used with the base station, and the used modulation processing method is notified to the base station.
  • Step 103 The terminal sends channel state information to the base station.
  • the terminal sends channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information carries
  • the UCI domain of the channel state information may also carry related notification information, as follows:
  • the terminal uses the same modulation processing method as that in the base station configuration signaling;
  • the terminal may choose to carry the CQI only in the channel state information; or may select to notify the base station that the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table by using the UCI field of the channel state information in the channel state information.
  • the terminal uses different modulation processing methods than the base station configuration signaling
  • the terminal needs to notify the base station that the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table through the UCI field of the channel state information in the channel state information.
  • Step 104 The base station receives channel state information sent by the terminal.
  • the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation mode, and L is a positive integer;
  • the CQI is based on a conventional CQI table.
  • the base station indicates, by using the configuration signaling, that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, and the terminal reports the CQI of the two transport blocks
  • the CQIs of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced CQI table, or The CQI of only one of the two transport blocks is based on the enhanced CQI table.
  • the method includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, when the terminal reports the CQI, it is notified by the 1 bit of the second transport block differential CQI that the CQI of the first and/or second transport block of the base station is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table.
  • the second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI;
  • the base station When the number of transmission layers is >1, for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI and does not report the PMI, when the terminal reports the CQI, the base station notifies the base station by adding 1 bit in the UCI domain, and the CQI of the first transmission block is based on the enhanced CQI table. Or a regular CQI table,
  • the terminal notifying the base station of the second transport block by another bit added by the UCI domain, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
  • the terminal notifies the base station by using a PTI field of channel state information, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
  • the enhanced CQI table is a 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI ⁇ is represented by 5 bits;
  • the CQI of the first or two transport blocks is based on the enhanced 5 bits.
  • the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits; the second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI;
  • the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
  • the CQI of two transport blocks is jointly reported by 7 bits, that is, any one of the 7th powers of 2 that can be represented by 7 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks CQI;
  • rank > 1 the CQI of the first and second transport blocks is based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI without reporting the PMI, and the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits.
  • the CQI of the second transport block is represented by a 4-bit differential CQI;
  • the terminal informs the base station through a PTI field of channel state information based on sets A and B in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, the elements of the set A or B coming from the level in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, A and B Mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
  • the reporting of the CSI for the non-period includes the following reporting manners:
  • a new 1 bit is added to inform the base station whether the wideband CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
  • the wideband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table and is represented by 5 bits;
  • the subband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and is represented by X bits, the X > 3 being a positive integer;
  • Step 105 The base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal.
  • the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS .
  • the terminal may be notified by the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling.
  • An enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table is as follows:
  • the modulation processing method used by the base station is the same as that configured in step 101;
  • the base station may notify the terminal that the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table by using the DCI domain or the C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling, or may not be in the DCI domain of the downlink control signaling or
  • the C-RNTI carries information about the forms used.
  • the modulation processing method used by the base station is different from that configured in step 101;
  • the base station needs to notify the terminal/ MCS based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table by using the DCI domain or the C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling.
  • the DCI domain involved in this step includes at least one of the following:
  • New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command When the base station configuration selects an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode, the number of transmission layers is rank ⁇ L, the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation mode, and L is a positive integer; for rank > L, the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table.
  • the method further includes at least one of the following:
  • the / MCS of both transport blocks are based on the enhanced MCS table;
  • the / MCS of one transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table, and the other transport block/
  • the MCS is based on a conventional MCS table;
  • the / MCS of the transport block is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table.
  • the method further includes at least one of the following:
  • the base station When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station notifies the terminal of the first transmission block and/or another transmission by using 1 bit in the first transmission block modulation and coding mode field.
  • the base station uses the PQI to inform the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table, and the upper layer configures the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI.
  • Table, or PQI is only used to indicate an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table and no longer indicates PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
  • the base station uses the TPC command to notify the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table. Specifically, the TPC command indicates the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table while indicating the TPC;
  • the / MCS of a single transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are indicated by the new data of the second transport block ( New data indicator) 1 bit of the field and the first transmission block modulation and coding mode i or 5 bits;
  • the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are modulated and encoded by another transport block. 1 bit in the domain and 5 bits of the first transport block modulation and coding mode field, the remaining 4 bits of the modulation and coding mode field of the other transport block as the difference / MCS relative to the first transport block, ie another transmission / MCS with the I-th / MCS differential / MCS transport block summing block;
  • the / MCS of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, and the / MCS of the two transport blocks uses 10 bits. Joint reporting, that is, any one of the 10 tenths of 2 that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks/ MCS ;
  • the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which is represented by the first transport block redundancy version.
  • the /MCS of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and are represented by 6 bits.
  • the 6 bits are all
  • the / MCS based on the enhanced MCS table 6 bits in set A or B, the set of 6-bit MCS table element A or B from the enhancement of the level of, A, and B Mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table.
  • the indication set A or B is configured by the upper layer in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI, or the PQI is only used to indicate the set A or B and no longer indicates the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
  • the elements of the set A or B are from the level in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and A And B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table, specifically, the TPC command indicates the set A or B while indicating the TPC;
  • the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table; when the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using a pre-configured C-RNTI plus or minus j, / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table.
  • Step 106 The terminal receives downlink control signaling sent by the base station.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing device, and the structure thereof is as shown in FIG. 2, including:
  • the first configuration module 201 is configured to send configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. Selecting a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, that is, an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table supporting the M-th order modulation mode, the
  • M > 256 and is a positive integer.
  • the device further comprises:
  • the second configuration module 202 is configured to set the other configuration signaling in addition to the predefined resource set to indicate that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the selection is not supported.
  • a regular table of M-order modulation methods are configured to set the other configuration signaling in addition to the predefined resource set to indicate that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the selection is not supported.
  • the device further comprises:
  • the channel state information receiving module 203 is configured to receive channel state information of the terminal, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and carry a CQI table or a conventional CQI indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI in the UCI domain of the channel state information. Table information.
  • the device further comprises:
  • the control signaling sending module 204 is configured to send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and notify the terminal by using a DCI domain or a C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling
  • the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
  • New data indicator field PQI
  • redundancy version field TPC command.
  • the high-order code modulation processing device shown in Fig. 2 can be integrated in the base station, and the corresponding functions are performed by the base station.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing device, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 3, and includes:
  • the configuration signaling obtaining module 301 is configured to receive downlink data, and obtain configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the configuration signaling indicates that the M-th order modulation mode is selected to be supported on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode.
  • the enhanced table or indication selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, M ⁇ 256 and is a positive integer.
  • the device further comprises:
  • the channel state information sending module 302 is configured to send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and notify the base station that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular by using a UCI domain of the channel state information. CQI table.
  • the device further comprises:
  • the control signaling receiving module 303 is configured to receive downlink control signaling sent by the base station, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and the DCI domain or C-RNTI that passes the downlink control signaling Knowing that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
  • New data indicates the domain, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
  • the high-order code modulation processing device shown in FIG. 3 can be integrated in the terminal, and the corresponding work is completed by the terminal.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing system, including a base station and a terminal.
  • the base station includes a high-order code modulation processing device as shown in FIG. 2, and is configured to send configuration signaling to the terminal.
  • the configuration signaling indicates that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a zero predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode, the enhancement.
  • the table is an enhanced CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table supporting the M-order modulation mode, which is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS that does not support the M-order modulation mode.
  • the terminal includes a high-order code modulation processing device, as shown in FIG. 3, configured to receive downlink 5 data, and obtain the configuration signaling sent by the base station.
  • the base station is further configured to allocate other resources than the predefined resource set, and the other configuration signaling indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the M-order modulation mode is not selected. Regular form.
  • the terminal is further configured to send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and notify, by the UCI domain of the channel state information, that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI.
  • the channel state information includes at least a CQI
  • the base station is further configured to receive channel state information sent by the terminal.
  • the base station is further configured to send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink 5 control signaling includes at least / MCS , and the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling is notified by the
  • the terminal/ MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, and the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
  • New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command The terminal is further configured to receive the downlink control signaling.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also provide a computer program, including program instructions, that when executed by a base station, cause the base station to perform the above method.
  • the embodiment of the invention further provides a computer program, comprising program instructions, when the program instruction is executed by the terminal, so that the terminal can execute the above method.
  • Embodiments of the present invention also provide a carrier carrying the above computer program.
  • the high-order code modulation processing apparatus and system provided by the embodiments of the present invention can be combined with a high-order code modulation processing method provided by an embodiment of the present invention, and the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling is Indicating that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, where the enhanced table supports the M-order An enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table of a modulation scheme, which is a conventional CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table that does not support the M-order modulation scheme.
  • the higher-order modulation processing of the base station and the terminal is realized by carrying configuration signaling with information related to the use of the table, and the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode is solved.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention can flexibly feedback the channel state and the scheduling use by appropriately configuring the CQI/MCS/TBS table supporting the M-th order modulation mode (M is greater than or equal to 256) in a high SNR environment.
  • M is greater than or equal to 256
  • the order modulation mode supports high-order modulation on the basis of compatibility with existing wireless transmission networks, which can better realize adaptive code modulation and improve system peak rate and spectrum efficiency.
  • the use of the M-th order modulation mode (M is greater than or equal to 256) can be reasonably configured to provide a suitable signal to interference and noise ratio condition for the use of the M-th order modulation mode; without increasing signaling overhead
  • the channel state can be fully and flexibly fed back, and the M-order modulation mode can be flexibly scheduled.
  • the solution of the embodiment of the present invention well supports the use of the M-th order modulation mode, and improves the spectrum efficiency and the peak rate of data transmission of the wireless communication system.
  • all or part of the steps of the foregoing embodiments may also be implemented by using an integrated circuit. These steps may be separately fabricated into individual integrated circuit modules, or multiple modules or steps may be fabricated into a single integrated circuit module. achieve.
  • the invention is not limited to any particular combination of hardware and software.
  • the various devices/function modules/functional units in the above embodiments may be implemented using a general-purpose computing device, which may be centralized on a single computing device or distributed over a network of multiple computing devices.
  • Each device/function module/functional unit in the above embodiments can be stored in a computer readable storage medium when implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as a standalone product.
  • the above mentioned computer readable storage medium may be a read only memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk or the like.
  • the embodiments of the present invention implement higher order modulation processing of the base station and the terminal, and solve the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher order modulation mode.

Abstract

A higher-order coding modulation method, apparatus and system. The method comprises: a base station sending configuration signaling to a terminal, the configuration signaling indicating that the base station selects an enhanced form supporting an M-order modulation mode or selects an ordinary form not to supporting the M-order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode, the enhanced form being an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or TBS table supporting the M-order modulation mode, the ordinary form being an ordinary CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table not supporting the M-order modulation mode, and M being greater than or equal to 256 and being a positive integer.

Description

高阶编码处理方法、 装置和系统 技术领域  High-order coding processing method, device and system
本发明涉及移动通信领域, 尤其涉及一种高阶编码处理方法、 装置和系 统。  The present invention relates to the field of mobile communications, and in particular, to a high-order coding processing method, apparatus, and system.
背景技术 Background technique
在移动通信系统中, 由于无线衰落信道时变的特点, 使得通信过程存在 大量的不确定性。 一方面为了提高系统吞吐量, 釆用传输速率较高的高阶调 制和少冗余纠错码进行通信, 这样在无线衰落信道信噪比比较理想时系统吞 吐量确实得到了很大的提高, 但当信道处于深衰落时则无法保障通信可靠稳 定地进行, 另一方面, 为了保障通信的可靠性, 釆用传输速率较低的低阶调 制和大冗余糾错码进行通信, 即在无线信道处于深衰落时保障通信可靠稳定 的进行, 然而当信道信噪比较高时, 由于传输速率较低, 制约了系统吞吐量 的提高, 从而造成了资源的浪费。 在移动通信技术的发展早期, 人们对抗无 线衰落信道的时变特性, 只能釆用加大发射机的发射功率, 使用低阶大冗余 的调制编码方法来保障系统在信道深衰落时的通信质量, 还无暇考虑如何提 高系统的吞吐量。 随着技术水平的进步, 出现了可根据信道状态自适应地调 节其发射功率, 调制编码方式以及数据的帧长来克服信道的时变特性从而获 得最佳通信效果的技术, 被称为自适应编码调制技术, 属于最典型的链路自 适应技术。  In mobile communication systems, due to the time-varying characteristics of wireless fading channels, there is a large amount of uncertainty in the communication process. On the one hand, in order to improve the system throughput, high-order modulation with high transmission rate and less redundant error correction code are used for communication, so that the system throughput is greatly improved when the signal-to-noise ratio of the wireless fading channel is ideal. However, when the channel is in deep fading, communication cannot be guaranteed to be reliable and stable. On the other hand, in order to ensure communication reliability, low-order modulation with low transmission rate and large redundant error correction code are used for communication, that is, in wireless When the channel is in deep fading, the communication is guaranteed to be reliable and stable. However, when the channel signal-to-noise ratio is relatively high, the transmission rate is low, which restricts the improvement of the system throughput, thereby causing waste of resources. In the early development of mobile communication technology, people can only use the transmission power of the transmitter to combat the time-varying characteristics of the wireless fading channel, and use the low-order and large-redundancy modulation and coding methods to ensure the communication of the system during deep channel fading. Quality, there is no way to consider how to increase the throughput of the system. With the advancement of the technology level, there has been a technology that can adaptively adjust its transmission power, modulation coding mode and frame length of data according to the channel state to overcome the time-varying characteristics of the channel to obtain the best communication effect, which is called adaptive. Coded modulation technology is the most typical link adaptation technology.
在长期演进(LTE: Long Term Evolution ) 系统中, 为实现自适应编码调 制技术, 上行需要传输包括信道状态信息 (CSI: Channel State Information ) 在内的控制信令。 CSI包括信道质量指示(CQI: Channel quality indication ) 、 预编码矩阵指示 (PMI: Pre-coding Matrix Indicator ) 和秩指示 ( RI: Rank Indicator ) 。 CSI反映了下行物理信道状态。 基站利用 CSI进行下行调度, 进 行数据的编码调制。 CSI的反馈可以是周期性的, 也可以是非周期性的。  In the Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, in order to implement the adaptive coding and modulation technology, the uplink needs to transmit control signaling including channel state information (CSI: Channel State Information). The CSI includes a Channel Quality Indication (CQI), a Pre-coding Matrix Indicator (PMI), and a Rank Indicator (RI: Rank Indicator). The CSI reflects the state of the downlink physical channel. The base station uses CSI for downlink scheduling and performs data coding and modulation. The feedback of the CSI can be periodic or non-periodic.
CQI是用来衡量下行信道质量好坏的一个指标。 在 36-213 协议中 CQI 用 0 ~ 15的整数值来表示, 分别代表了不同的 CQI等级, 不同 CQI对应着各 自的调制编码方案 (MCS: Modulation and Coding Scheme ) , 见表 1。 终端 ( UE: User Equiment )所选择的 CQI等级, 应使得该 CQI所对应的物理下行 共享信道( PDSCH: Physical Downlink Shared Channel M专输块( TB: Transport Block )在相应的 MCS下的误块率不超过 0.1。 CQI is an indicator used to measure the quality of downlink channels. In the 36-213 protocol, CQI is represented by an integer value of 0 to 15, which represents different CQI levels, and different CQIs correspond to each. Self-modulation coding scheme (MCS: Modulation and Coding Scheme), see Table 1. The CQI level selected by the UE (User Equiment) should be such that the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH: Physical Downlink Shared Channel M special transport block (TB: Transport Block) corresponding to the CQI is in the corresponding MCS. Not more than 0.1.
表 1  Table 1
Figure imgf000004_0001
Figure imgf000004_0001
上表 1中 QAM表示正交幅度调制 ( Quadrature Amplitude Modulation ) , QPSK表示正交相移键控 ( Quadrature Phase Shift Keying ) , 是一种数字调制 方式。 在 LTE中, 除差分 CQI外, CQI用 4比特表示。 CQI比特包含在上行控 制信息 (UCI : Uplink Control Information ) 中上报。 基站结合终端上报的 CQI进行调度, 并确定下行 MCS索引和资源分配信息。 具体来说, Rel-8的 LTE 协议定义了一个调制和传输块大小表格 ( Modulation and TBS index table, 以下也称为 MCS Table、 MCS表)。 表格共有 32个等级, 基本上每一 等级对应一个 MCS索引, 而每一个 MCS索引本质上对应一种 MCS ( 或者 一种频谱效率, 注意该 MCS并不局限于表 1的 MCS )。 而资源分配信息给 出了下行传输需要占用的物理资源块个数 NPRB。LTE标准还提供了一个 TBS 表格。 根据所述表格, 给定 MCS 索引和 NPRB后就可以得到传输块大小 ( TBS: Transport block size )。 有了这些编码调制参数( MCS/NPRB/TBS ) 基站就可以进行下行数据的编码调制, 进行下行传输。 In Table 1 above, QAM represents Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, and QPSK represents Quadrature Phase Shift Keying, which is a digital modulation method. In LTE, the CQI is represented by 4 bits in addition to the differential CQI. The CQI bit is included in the uplink control information (UCI: Uplink Control Information). The base station performs scheduling according to the CQI reported by the terminal, and determines downlink MCS index and resource allocation information. Specifically, the LTE protocol of Rel-8 defines a Modulation and TBS index table (hereinafter also referred to as MCS Table, MCS table). The table has a total of 32 levels, basically each level corresponds to one MCS index, and each MCS index essentially corresponds to an MCS (or a spectral efficiency, note that the MCS is not limited to the MCS of Table 1). The resource allocation information gives the number of physical resource blocks NPRB that the downlink transmission needs to occupy. The LTE standard also provides a TBS form. According to the table, the transport block size (TBS: Transport block size) can be obtained given the MCS index and NPRB. With these coded modulation parameters (MCS/NPRB/TBS), the base station can perform coded modulation of downlink data for downlink transmission.
终端接收下行传输的数据后, 需要获取下行传输的 MCS索引和 TBS用 于数据的解调解码。基站通过物理下行控制信道(PDCCH: Physical Downlink Control Channel ) , 以特定的下行控制信息 ( DCI: Downlink Control Information )格式(DCI format )发送下行控制信息, 包括 5比特的 MCS索 引, 以及资源分配位置。 终端获取下行控制信息后根据 TBS表格得到 TBS, 并用于解调解码。 DCI格式包括以下多种: DCI format O、 DCI format 1 , DCI format 1A、 DCI format 1B、 DCI format 1C、 DCI format 1D、 DCI format 2、 DCI format 2A、 DCI format 2B、 DCI format 2C、 DCI format 2D、 DCI format 3 和 DCI format 3A等。  After receiving the downlink transmission data, the terminal needs to obtain the MCS index of the downlink transmission and the demodulation decoding of the TBS for the data. The base station transmits downlink control information, including a 5-bit MCS index, and a resource allocation location, by using a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH: Physical Downlink Control Channel) in a specific DCI (Downlink Control Information) format (DCI format). After acquiring the downlink control information, the terminal obtains the TBS according to the TBS table, and is used for demodulation and decoding. The DCI format includes the following types: DCI format O, DCI format 1, DCI format 1A, DCI format 1B, DCI format 1C, DCI format 1D, DCI format 2, DCI format 2A, DCI format 2B, DCI format 2C, DCI format 2D , DCI format 3 and DCI format 3A, etc.
LTE 系统在经历了 Rel-8/9/10/11 几个版本后, 又陆续研究 R12技术。 Rel-11标准中, 上行和下行最高支持 64QAM的调制编码方式。 伴随着异构 网的发展, 小小区 (small cell )需要更高的数据传输速率和更高的系统频谱 效率, 要求引入更高阶调制编码方式, 比如 256 QAM。 现有标准无法满足这 种需求。 比如, LTE标准的常规表格, 即 CQI表/ MCS表 /TBS表最高支持 64 QAM的调制编码方式以及约 5.5547比特 /s/Hz的频谱效率。  After experiencing several versions of Rel-8/9/10/11, the LTE system has been researching R12 technology. In the Rel-11 standard, the uplink and downlink support up to 64QAM modulation and coding. Along with the development of heterogeneous networks, small cells require higher data transmission rates and higher system spectral efficiency, and require higher order modulation coding, such as 256 QAM. Existing standards cannot meet this need. For example, the conventional table of the LTE standard, that is, the CQI table/MCS table/TBS table supports up to 64 QAM modulation coding mode and spectral efficiency of about 5.5547 bits/s/Hz.
上面以 LTE系统为例表明, 常规表格(即现有的 CQI表, MCS表, TBS 表) 无法支持更高阶调制方式。 在通信系统引入高阶调制方式, 比如 256 QAM, 1024QAM后, 需要设计支持高阶调制方式的增强表格(新的 CQI表, MCS表, TBS表)。 有两种设计方案: 方案一设计的包含高阶调制方式 MCS 等级的增强表格大小与常规表格大小相等, 比如, 对于 LTE 系统, 新 CQI 表和 MCS表分别为 16和 32个等级; 方案二设计的包含高阶调制方式 MCS 等级的增强表格大小大于常规表格, 比如,对于 LTE系统,新 CQI表和 MCS 表分别为 32和 64个等级。 表格越大, 所能覆盖的频谱效率范围越大, 或者 获得更高的频谱效率颗粒度; 但所需要用于表示该表格的比特数也越多。 为 了简单说明两种方案的优缺点, 下面 LTE系统引入 256QAM后新 CQI表的 设计为例。 对于方案一, 新 CQI表覆盖的频谱效率范围以及频谱效率颗粒度 ( 频谱效率颗粒度对应了信道状态反馈的精度)是一对矛盾。 即, 要覆盖大 的频谱效率范围必然导致频谱效率颗粒度的降低; 要维持现有频谱效率颗粒 度必然导致增强表格无法覆盖常规表格(表 1 ) 中的最小频谱效率以及 256 QAM最高的频谱效率所限制的频谱效率范围。 但方案一不影响 CQI比特数, 不会导致 UCI payload (上行控制信息负载) 的增加, 不用考虑 CQI比特增 加可能带来的 UCI解调性能下降问题。 对于方案二, 新 CQI表/ MCS表可以 在不影响频谱效率颗粒度的情况下完全覆盖现有表格中的最小频谱效率以及 256 QAM最高的频语效率所限制的频语效率范围, 但却增加 CQI比特数目, 需要考虑 UCI payload增加以及 UCI解调性能下降的问题。 同样地, 新 MCS 表的方案也存在类似的问题。 Taking the LTE system as an example, the conventional table (ie, the existing CQI table, the MCS table, the TBS table) cannot support the higher order modulation mode. After the high-order modulation mode is introduced in the communication system, such as 256 QAM and 1024QAM, it is necessary to design an enhanced table (new CQI table) supporting high-order modulation. MCS table, TBS table). There are two design schemes: The enhanced table size of the MCS level including the high-order modulation mode of the first scheme is equal to the regular table size. For example, for the LTE system, the new CQI table and the MCS table are 16 and 32 levels respectively; The enhanced table size including the high-order modulation mode MCS level is larger than the conventional table. For example, for the LTE system, the new CQI table and the MCS table are 32 and 64 levels, respectively. The larger the table, the larger the spectral efficiency range that can be covered, or the higher the spectral efficiency granularity; but the more bits needed to represent the table. In order to briefly describe the advantages and disadvantages of the two schemes, the following LTE system introduces the design of the new CQI table after 256QAM as an example. For scenario 1, the spectral efficiency range covered by the new CQI table and the spectral efficiency granularity (the spectral efficiency granularity corresponds to the accuracy of the channel state feedback) are a pair of contradictions. That is, covering a large spectral efficiency range necessarily leads to a reduction in spectral efficiency granularity; maintaining the existing spectral efficiency granularity necessarily results in an enhanced table that cannot cover the minimum spectral efficiency in the regular table (Table 1) and the highest spectral efficiency of 256 QAM. The range of spectral efficiencies that are limited. However, the solution 1 does not affect the number of CQI bits, and does not cause an increase in the UCI payload (uplink control information load), and does not consider the UCI demodulation performance degradation problem that may be caused by the increase in CQI bits. For scenario two, the new CQI table/MCS table can completely cover the minimum spectral efficiency in the existing table and the frequency efficiency range limited by the highest frequency efficiency of 256 QAM without affecting the spectral efficiency granularity, but increase The number of CQI bits needs to consider the problem of increased UCI payload and degraded UCI demodulation performance. Similarly, similar problems exist with the new MCS table approach.
目前通信系统的常规表格无法支持更高阶调制方式, 也没有解决具体的 高阶调制方式增强表格和常规表格的配置使用问题。 因此, 目前通信系统无 法支持更高阶调制方式。 在信道条件比较好、 可能应用更高阶调制方式的场 景, 比如小小区 ( Small Cell )场景中, 限制了数据传输峰值速率以及系统频 谱效率的提升。  At present, the conventional table of the communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode, and does not solve the problem of the configuration use of the specific high-order modulation enhancement table and the regular table. Therefore, current communication systems cannot support higher order modulation methods. In scenes where channel conditions are better and higher order modulation schemes may be applied, such as Small Cell scenarios, the peak data transmission rate and the efficiency of the system spectrum are limited.
发明内容 Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法、 装置和系统, 解决了 现有通信系统无法支持更高阶调制方式的问题。  The embodiment of the invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method, device and system, which solves the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode.
一种高阶编码调制处理方法, 包括:  A high-order code modulation processing method includes:
基站向终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源 集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选 择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式 的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M 较佳的, 该方法还包括: The base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station is in a predefined resource. Selecting an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode on the set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selecting a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table supporting the M-order modulation mode and/or Or the MCS table and/or the TBS table, the conventional table is preferably not supported by M, and the method further includes:
所述基站在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合上, 和 /或对除预定 义传输方式之外的其他传输方式下的终端配置其他信令, 所述其他配置信令 指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常 规表格。  The base station configures other signaling on the other resource set except the predefined resource set, and/or the terminal in other transmission modes except the predefined transmission mode, where the other configuration signaling indicates selection support. An enhanced table of M-order modulation methods or a regular table that does not support M-order modulation.
较佳的, 所述预定义的资源集合, 包括以下至少之一:  Preferably, the predefined set of resources includes at least one of the following:
预定义的子帧集合, 预定义的频域资源集合, 预定义的下行天线端口集 合, 预定义的传输层数集合。  A predefined set of subframes, a predefined set of frequency domain resources, a predefined set of downstream antenna ports, and a predefined set of transport layers.
较佳的, 所述预定义的子帧集合, 包括以下至少之一:  Preferably, the predefined set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
基站配置的子帧集合, 固定的子帧集合。  A set of subframes configured by the base station, a fixed set of subframes.
较佳的, 所述基站配置的子帧集合包括以下至少之一:  Preferably, the set of subframes configured by the base station includes at least one of the following:
子帧集合 0 ( subframe set 0 ) , 子帧集合 1 ( subframe set 1 ) , 多播 广播单频网络 ( Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network, MBSFN )子帧, 对于增强的冲突管理业务自适应 ( enhanced Interference Management Traffic Adaptation, elMTA ) , 由系统消息块 1 ( SIBl )配置的下行子帧集合, elMTA 中时分双工 ( Time Division Duplexing, TDD ) DL子帧中由 UL子帧切换而 来的 DL子帧集合, Relay场景中的 backhaul子帧集合, Relay场景中的 Access 子帧集合, 设备对设备 ( Device to Device , D2D )通讯中的 D2D子帧集合。  Subframe set 0 ( subframe set 0 ), subframe set 1 (Multicast Broadcast Single Frequency Network, MBSFN) subframe, enhanced collision management service (enhanced Interference Management) Traffic Adaptation, elMTA), a set of downlink subframes configured by system message block 1 (SIB1), a set of DL subframes switched by UL subframes in a Time Division Duplexing (TDD) DL subframe in elMTA, The backhaul subframe set in the relay scenario, the Access subframe set in the Relay scenario, and the D2D subframe set in the Device to Device (D2D) communication.
较佳的, 所述固定的子帧集合, 包括以下至少之一:  Preferably, the fixed set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
由子帧号《 = 0 , 1 , ... ... , 9对应的子帧的一个或者多个构成的子帧集 合,  a set of subframes consisting of one or more subframes corresponding to the subframe number " = 0 , 1 , ... , 9 ,
TDD帧结构中的一般子帧,  a general subframe in the TDD frame structure,
TDD帧结构中, 特殊子帧配置 0, 1 , ... ... , 9中的一种或者多种配置的 下行导频时隙 (Downlink Pilot Time Slot, DwPTS ) 。 较佳的, 所述方法还包括以下至少之一: In the TDD frame structure, the special subframe is configured with one or more of the configured Downlink Pilot Time Slots (DwPTSs) of 0, 1, 9, and 9. Preferably, the method further includes at least one of the following:
对于子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1 ,基站分别选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的 增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格;  For the subframe set 0 and the subframe set 1 , the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于子帧集合 0,基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 对于子帧集合 1 , 基站选择配置不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格;  For the subframe set 0, the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 1, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于子帧集合 1 ,基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 对于子帧集合 0, 基站选择配置不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格;  For the subframe set 1 , the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 0, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于 Relay场景中的 backhaul子帧集合和 Access子帧集合, 基站分别选 择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表 格;  For the backhaul subframe set and the Access subframe set in the relay scenario, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于 elMTA中 TDD DL子帧中由 UL子帧切换而来的 DL子帧集合和由 系统消息块 1( SIB1 )消息配置的下行子帧集合,基站分别选择配置支持 M 阶 调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。  For the DL subframe set switched by the UL subframe in the TDD DL subframe in the elMTA and the downlink subframe set configured by the System Message Block 1 (SIB1) message, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or Regular tables with M-order modulation are not supported.
较佳的, 所述预定义的频域资源集合, 包括频谱资源中不被 X2信令指 示的可能受相邻基站高度干扰的资源。  Preferably, the predefined set of frequency domain resources includes resources in the spectrum resources that are not interfered by X2 signaling and may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations.
较佳的, 对于由 X2信令指示的可能受相邻基站高度干扰的频率资源, 所述基站选择配置不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格;  Preferably, for the frequency resource indicated by the X2 signaling that may be highly interfered by the neighboring base station, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode;
对于除可能受相邻基站高度干扰的频率资源之外的其他频率资源, 所述 基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常 规表格。  For other frequency resources than frequency resources that may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations, the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation scheme or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation scheme.
较佳的, 所述预定义的下行天线端口集合的子集包括以下至少之一: Preferably, the subset of the predefined downlink antenna port set includes at least one of the following:
{天线端口 5 } , {天线端口 7至 7 +;? } , {天线端口 8 +;? 至 14 } , {天线端口 0至 3 } , 其中, p 为正整数, 且 0≤/?≤6。 {Antenna port 5 }, {Antenna port 7 to 7 +;? } , {Antenna port 8 +;? to 14 } , {Antenna port 0 to 3 } , where p is a positive integer and 0 ≤ /? ≤ 6 .
较佳的,所述预定义的传输层数集合为满足 1≤rank≤ 的所有正整数的 集合, 其中, rank为传输层数, 即所述传输层数集合的元素, 为 M 阶调制 方式所支持的最大传输层数, 且 为正整数。 较佳的, 所述预定义的传输方式, 包括以下至少之一: Preferably, the predefined set of transport layer numbers is a set of all positive integers satisfying 1≤rank≤, where rank is the number of transport layers, that is, the elements of the set of transport layer numbers, which are M-order modulation modes. The maximum number of transport layers supported, and is a positive integer. Preferably, the predefined transmission manner includes at least one of the following:
空间复用传输方式;  Spatial multiplexing transmission method;
非空间复用传输方式, 至少包括以下之一:  The non-spatial multiplexing transmission method includes at least one of the following:
发射分集传输方式, 单天线端口传输方式;  Transmit diversity transmission mode, single antenna port transmission mode;
基于 DMRS的传输方式;  DMRS based transmission method;
基于 CRS的传输方式。  CRS-based transmission method.
较佳的, 基站向终端发送配置信令的步骤之后, 还包括:  Preferably, after the step of sending, by the base station, the configuration signaling to the terminal, the method further includes:
所述基站接收所述终端的信道状态信息, 所述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 在所述信道状态信息的 UCI域携带表明所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或 常规 CQI表的信息。  The base station receives channel state information of the terminal, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and the UCI field of the channel state information carries information indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table.
较佳的, 当基站选择配置了支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时: 对于传输层数 rank < L, 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表, 其中 L为 M 阶 调制方式所支持的最大传输层数, 且 L为正整数;  Preferably, when the base station selects and configures an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode: for the number of transmission layers rank < L, the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation mode. , and L is a positive integer;
对于 rank > L, 所述 CQI基于常规 CQI表。  For rank > L, the CQI is based on a conventional CQI table.
较佳的,当所述基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增 强表格, 且终端上报两个传输块的 CQI时, 所述两个传输块的 CQI都基于增 强的 CQI表, 或所述两个传输块中仅有一个传输块的 CQI基于增强的 CQI 表。  Preferably, when the base station indicates, by using the configuration signaling, that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, and the terminal reports the CQI of the two transport blocks, the CQIs of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced CQI table. , or the CQI of only one of the two transport blocks is based on an enhanced CQI table.
较佳的,所述基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强 表格时, 对于周期上报 CSI, 该方法至少包括以下之一:  Preferably, when the base station indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected by using the configuration signaling, the method includes at least one of the following:
当传输层数 rank = 1时, 终端上报 CQI时通过 UCI域的 1比特通知基站 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表;  When the number of transmission layers rank = 1, when the terminal reports the CQI, the base station is notified by the 1 bit of the UCI field, and the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 终端上报 CQI时通过第二个传输块差分 CQI的 1比特通知基站第一个和 /或第二个传输块的所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是 常规 CQI表, 所述第二个传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示;  When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, when the terminal reports the CQI, it is notified by the 1 bit of the second transport block differential CQI that the CQI of the first and/or second transport block of the base station is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table. The second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 对于只上报 CQI而不上报 PMI的 PUCCH上报 类型, 终端上报 CQI时通过 UCI域新增的 1比特通知基站, 第一个传输块所 述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表, When the number of transmission layers is >1, for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI and does not report the PMI, when the terminal reports the CQI, the terminal adds the 1 bit added to the UCI domain to notify the base station, and the first transmission block Whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a conventional CQI table,
和 /或所述终端通过 UCI域新增的另一比特通知基站所述第二个传输块 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表;  And/or the terminal notifying the base station of the second transport block by another bit added by the UCI domain, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
终端通过信道状态信息的 PTI域通知基站, 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表 还是常规 CQI表;  The terminal notifies the base station by using a PTI field of channel state information, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
当传输层数 rank = 1时,所述增强的 CQI表为 5比特 CQI表,且所述 CQI 釆用 5比特表示;  When the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the enhanced CQI table is a 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI 釆 is represented by 5 bits;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个或两个传输块的 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 第一个传输块的 CQI用 5 比特表示; 第二个传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示;  When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the CQI of the first or two transport blocks is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table, the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits; the second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI ;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5 比特 CQI表。 两个传输块的 CQI釆用 7比特联合上报, 即 7个比特所能表示 的 27种情况中的任何一种都指示了两个传输块 CQI的一种组合; When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table. The CQI of two transport blocks is jointly reported by 7 bits, that is, any of the 27 cases that 7 bits can represent indicates a combination of two transport blocks CQI;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 对于只上报 CQI而不上报 PMI的 PUCCH上报 类型, 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 第一个传 输块的 CQI用 5比特表示, 第二个传输块的 CQI用 4比特差分 CQI表示; 终端通过信道状态信息的 PTI域通知基站, 所述 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表中的集合 A和 B,所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 5比特 CQI表中 的等级, A和 B互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 5比特 CQI表。  When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI without reporting the PMI, the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI of the first transport block is used. 5 bits indicate that the CQI of the second transport block is represented by a 4-bit differential CQI; the terminal notifies the base station by the PTI field of the channel state information, the CQI being based on sets A and B in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, the set A The element of B or B comes from the level in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
较佳的,当所述基站通过配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表 格时, 对于非周期上报 CSI, 该方法至少包括以下之一:  Preferably, when the base station indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected by using the configuration signaling, the method includes at least one of the following:
新增 1 比特用于通知基站, 宽带 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI 表;  Add 1 bit to inform the base station, whether the wideband CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table;
新增 1 比特用于通知基站, 子带 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI 表;  A new 1 bit is added to inform the base station, and the subband CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table;
宽带 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 且釆用 5比特表示;  The wideband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table and is represented by 5 bits;
子带 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 且釆用 X个比特表示, 所述 X > 3 且为正整数; 较佳的, 基站在预定义的资源集合上, 和 /或对预定义传输方式下的终端 配置信令的步骤之后还包括: The subband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and is represented by X bits, the X > 3 and being a positive integer; Preferably, after the step of configuring the signaling by the base station on the predefined resource set, and/or the terminal in the predefined transmission mode, the base station further includes:
所述基站向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下行控制信令至少包括调 制和编码方式域(/MCS ) , 通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者小区无线网 络临时标识( Cell Radio Network Temporaryl dentifier, C-RNTI )通知所述终 端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括以下之 新数据指示 ( New data indicator ) 域, 导频质量指示 (Pilot Quality Indicator , PQI ) , 冗余版本域,发射功率控制( Transmit Power Control , TPC ) 命令。 The base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least a modulation and coding mode domain (/ MCS ), a DCI domain that passes the downlink control signaling, or a temporary identifier of a cell wireless network (Cell Radio) Network Temporaryl dentifier, C-RNTI) notifying the terminal that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, the DCI domain including at least the following new data indicator field, pilot quality indicator (Pilot) Quality Indicator, PQI), Redundancy Version, Transmit Power Control (TPC) command.
较佳的,其特征在于,当基站配置选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时, 对于传输层数 rank≤L, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表, 其中 L为 M 阶调制 方式所支持的最大传输层数, 且 L为正整数; 对于 rank > L, 所述 /MCS基于 常规 MCS表。 Preferably, when the base station is configured to select an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode, the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table, where L is the M-order modulation mode supported by the number of transmission layers, rank ≤ L. The maximum number of transmission layers, and L is a positive integer; for rank > L, the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table.
较佳的,当基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表 格时, 该方法还至少包括以下之一:  Preferably, when the base station indicates, by using the configuration signaling, that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, the method further includes at least one of the following:
对于两个传输块的下行传输, 两个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 MCS表; 对于两个传输块的下行传输, 一个传输块的 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表, 另一个传输块的 /MCS基于常规 MCS表; For downlink transmission of two transport blocks, the / MCS of both transport blocks are based on the enhanced MCS table; for the downlink transmission of two transport blocks, the / MCS of one transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table, and the other transport block/ The MCS is based on a conventional MCS table;
对于单个传输块的下行传输, 该传输块的 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或者 常规 MCS表。 For downlink transmission of a single transport block, the / MCS of the transport block is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table.
较佳的,当所述基站根据所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增 强表格时, 该方法还至少包括以下之一:  Preferably, when the base station indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected according to the configuration signaling, the method further includes at least one of the following:
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank = 1时, 所述基站通 过第二个传输块新数据指示域通知所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还 是常规 MCS表; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the base station notifies the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table by using the second transport block new data indication field;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 所述基站通 过第 ,个传输块调制和编码方式域中 1比特通知所述终端第 ,个传输块和 /或 另一个传输块所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 第 I个传输块 的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特作为相对于另一个传输块的差分 /MCS, 即第 I 个传输块的 /MCS用另一个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS求和得到; ζ· =2或者 1; 当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 所述基站通 过第 ,个传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特通知所述终端第 ,个传输块或两个传输 块所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 第 I个传输块冗余版本域 中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本, , =1或者 2; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station notifies the terminal of the first transmission block and/or by 1 bit in the first transmission block modulation and coding mode domain. Another transport block said / MCS based on the enhanced MCS table or the conventional MCS table, the remaining 4 bits of the modulation and coding mode field of the first transport block as the difference / MCS relative to the other transport block, ie the first transport block the / MCS with a / MCS differential / MCS summing another transmission block; ζ · = 2 or 1; when the DCI format 2 or DCI format is 2X, the number of layers rank> 1, the base station through the first, 1 bit in the transport block redundancy version field informs the terminal of the first transport block or two transport blocks, the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table, and the other 1 in the first transport block redundancy version field Bits are used to indicate two redundancy versions, =1 or 2;
对于 DCI format 2D, 所述基站使用 PQI通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 高层在现有 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set中配置指示增强的 MCS表或者常规 MCS表, 或者 PQI仅 用于指示增强的 MCS表或者常规 MCS表而不再指示 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; For the DCI format 2D, the base station uses the PQI to inform the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table, and the upper layer configures the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI. Table, or PQI is only used to indicate an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table and no longer indicates PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
所述基站使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 具体地, TPC命令在指示 TPC的同时也指示增强的 MCS表或者常 规 MCS表; The base station uses the TPC command to notify the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table. Specifically, the TPC command indicates the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table while indicating the TPC;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank = 1时, 单个传输块 的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由第二个传 输块新数据指示 ( New data indicator ) 域的 1比特和第一个传输块调制和 编码方式 i或的 5比特组成;  When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the /MCS of a single transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which is indicated by the new data of the second transport block ( New data indicator) 1 bit of the field and the first transmission block modulation and coding mode i or 5 bits;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第 个传输 块的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由另一个 传输块调制和编码方式域中 1比特和第 ,个传输块调制和编码方式域的 5比 特组成, 另一个传输块的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特作为相对于第 ,个传 输块的差分 /MCS, 即另一个传输块的 /MCS用第 I个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS 求和得到; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are modulated and encoded by another transport block. 1 bit and 1st block of the transport block are composed of 5 bits of the modulation and coding mode field, and the remaining 4 bits of the modulation and coding mode field of the other transport block are used as the difference / MCS with respect to the first transport block, that is, another transmission / MCS with the I-th / MCS differential / MCS transport block summing block;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个和第 二个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 两个传输块的 /MCS釆用 10 比特联合上报, 即 10个比特所能表示的 2的 10次方种情况中的任何一种都 指示了两个传输块 /MCS的一种组合; 当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第 个传输 块的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由第 I个 传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特联合调制和编码方式域的 5比特组成, 第 ,个传 输块冗余版本域中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本, , =1或者 2; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the / MCS of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, and the / MCS of the two transport blocks uses 10 bits. Joint reporting, that is, any one of the 10 tenths of 2 that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks/ MCS ; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which is represented by the first transport block redundancy version. The 5-bit joint modulation and coding mode field consists of 5 bits in the domain, and the other 1 bit in the first transmission block redundancy version field is used to indicate two redundancy versions, =1 or 2;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 两个传输块 的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 对于两个传输块, 该 6比特都由第 I个传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特联合调制和编码方式域的 5 比特组成,第 z个传输块冗余版本域中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本; z =l 或者 2;  When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and are represented by 6 bits. For the two transport blocks, the 6 bits are all The first transmission block redundancy version domain consists of 5 bits of the 1-bit joint modulation and coding mode field, and the other 1 bit of the z-th transmission block redundancy version field is used to indicate two redundancy versions; z = l or 2 ;
对于 DCI format 2D, 使用 PQI通知终端, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特For DCI format 2D, the terminal is notified using PQI, the / MCS is based on enhanced 6 bits
MCS表中的集合 A或者 B, 所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 6比特 MCS 表中的等级, A和 B互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 6比特 MCS表。 由高层在现有 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set中配置指 示集合 A或者 B,或者 PQI仅用于指示集合 A或者 B而不再指示 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; The set A or B in the MCS table, the elements of the set A or B are from the level in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table. The upper layer configures the indication set A or B in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI, or the PQI is only used to indicate the set A or B and no longer indicates the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特 MCS表中的集合 A 或者 B,所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 6比特 MCS表中的等级, A和 B 互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 6比特 MCS表, 具体地, TPC命令在 指示 TPC的同时也指示集合 A或者 B; Notifying the terminal using the TPC command that the / MCS is based on the set A or B in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, the elements of the set A or B are from the level in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and A And B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table, specifically, the TPC command indicates the set A or B while indicating the TPC;
当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI对 PDCCH的 CRC进行加扰时所述 /MCS基于 增强的 MCS表, 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI加或减 j对 PDCCH的 CRC进行 加扰时所述 /MCS基于常规的 MCS表, 其中, j为正整数; When a preconfigured C-RNTI on the CRC PDCCH for scrambling the / MCS MCS table based on the enhanced, when using the preconfigured C-RNTI plus or minus CRC PDCCH j of the scrambling / MCS Based on a conventional MCS table, where j is a positive integer;
当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI对 PDCCH的 CRC进行加扰时, 所述 /MCS基 于常规的 MCS表; 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI加或减 j对 PDCCH的 CRC进 行加扰时, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表。 When the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using a pre-configured C-RNTI, the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table; when the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using a pre-configured C-RNTI plus or minus j, / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table.
本发明实施例还提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法, 包括: The embodiment of the invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing method, including:
终端接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信令, 所述配置信令表明在预 定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义的传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增 强表格或者指示选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格 , M > 256且为正整数。 The terminal receives the downlink data, and obtains configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the configuration signaling indicates that the downlink An enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode is selected on the defined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or a conventional table indicating that the M-order modulation mode is not supported, M > 256 and is a positive integer.
较佳的, 终端接收下行数据, 获取基站在预定义的资源集合上, 和 /或对 于预定义的传输方式给终端配置的信令的步骤之后还包括:  Preferably, after receiving the downlink data, the acquiring the base station on the predefined resource set, and/or the signaling configured to the terminal by the predefined transmission mode, the terminal further includes:
所述终端向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所述信道状态信息至少包括 Transmitting, by the terminal, channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least
CQI,所述终端通过信道状态信息的 UCI域通知基站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI 表或者常规 CQI表。 The CQI, the terminal notifies the base station that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table through a UCI field of channel state information.
较佳的, 终端接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信令的步骤之后还包 括:  Preferably, after the step of receiving the downlink data and acquiring the configuration signaling sent by the base station, the terminal further includes:
所述终端接收所述基站发送的下行控制信令, 所述下行控制信令至少包 括 /MCS,所述终端通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI得知所述 /MCS 基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表, 所述 DCI域至少包括以下之一: The terminal receives the downlink control signaling sent by the base station, where the downlink control signaling includes at least /MCS, and the terminal learns that the / MCS is enhanced based on the DCI domain or the C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling. The MCS table or the regular MCS table, the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
新数据指示域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令。  New data indicates the domain, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
本发明实施例还提供了一种高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置包括: 第一配置模块, 其设置为: 向终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所 述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制 方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格,所述增强表格即 为支持 M阶调制方式的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常 The embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing device, where the device includes: a first configuration module, configured to: send configuration signaling to a terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station is in a predefined resource Selecting an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode on the set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selecting a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table supporting the M-order modulation mode and/or Or MCS table and / or TBS table, as described
M > 256且为正整数。 M > 256 and is a positive integer.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
第二配置模块, 其设置为: 在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合 所述其他配置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。  And a second configuration module, configured to: the other resource set except the predefined resource set. The other configuration signaling indicates that an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode is selected or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode is selected.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
信道状态信息接收模块, 其设置为: 接收所述终端的信道状态信息, 所 述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 在所述信道状态信息的 UCI域携带表明所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表的信息。 a channel state information receiving module, configured to: receive channel state information of the terminal, The channel state information includes at least a CQI, and the UCI domain of the channel state information carries information indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
控制信令下发模块, 其设置为: 向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下 行控制信令至少包括 /MCS, 通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通 知所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包 括以下之一: a control signaling sending module, configured to: send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and notify the terminal by using a DCI domain or a C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling The / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
New data indicator域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令。  New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
本发明实施例还提供了一种高阶编码调制处理装置, 包括: The embodiment of the invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing device, including:
配置信令获取模块, 其设置为接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信令, 所述配置信令表明在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义的传输方式下选择 支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者指示选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表 格, M≥ 256且为正整数。  Configuring a signaling acquiring module, configured to receive downlink data, and obtain configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the configuration signaling indicates that the M-th order modulation mode is selected to be supported on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. The enhanced table or indication selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, M ≥ 256 and is a positive integer.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
信道状态信息发送模块, 其设置为: 向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所 述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 通过所述信道状态信息的 UCI域通知所述基 站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表。  a channel state information sending module, configured to: send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, notify, by the UCI domain of the channel state information, that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or Conventional CQI table.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
控制信令接收模块, 其设置为: 接收所述基站发送的下行控制信令, 所 述下行控制信令至少包括 /MCS,通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI 得知所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括以下 之一: a control signaling receiving module, configured to: receive downlink control signaling sent by the base station, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling is used to learn the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
新数据指示域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令。  New data indicates the domain, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
本发明实施例还提供了一种高阶编码调制处理系统, 包括基站和终端; 所述基站, 包括前面所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 设置为向所述终端 发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预 定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调 制方式的常规表格,所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调制方式的常规 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, M≥ 256且为正整数; The embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing system, including a base station and a terminal, where the base station includes the high-order code modulation processing device described above, and is configured to be to the terminal. Sending configuration signaling, the configuration signaling indicating that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode The enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table supporting an M-order modulation mode, which is a conventional CQI table and/or an MCS table that does not support the M-order modulation mode. And / or TBS table, M ≥ 256 and is a positive integer;
所述终端, 包括如前面所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 设置为接收下行 数据, 获取所述基站发送的所述配置信令。  The terminal, including the high-order code modulation processing device as described above, is configured to receive downlink data, and obtain the configuration signaling sent by the base station.
较佳的, 所述基站, 还设置为: 在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源 令,所述其他配置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。  Preferably, the base station is further configured to: in addition to a predefined resource set, the other configuration signaling indicates that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the M-order modulation mode is not selected. Regular form.
较佳的, 所述终端, 还设置为: 向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所述信 道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 通过所述信道状态信息的 UCI域通知所述基站所 述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表;  Preferably, the terminal is further configured to: send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and notify, by the UCI domain of the channel state information, that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI. Table or regular CQI table;
所述基站, 还设置为接收所述终端发送的信道状态信息。  The base station is further configured to receive channel state information sent by the terminal.
较佳的, 所述基站, 还设置为向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下行 控制信令至少包括 /MCS, 通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通知 所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括 以下之一: Preferably, the base station is further configured to send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and notify the terminal by using a DCI domain or a C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling. The / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
New data indicator域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令;  New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command;
所述终端, 还设置为接收所述下行控制信令。  The terminal is further configured to receive the downlink control signaling.
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机程序, 包括程序指令, 当该程序指令被 基站执行时, 使得该基站可执行上述方法。  Embodiments of the present invention also provide a computer program, including program instructions, that when executed by a base station, cause the base station to perform the above method.
本发明实施例还提供一种载有上述计算机程序的载体。  Embodiments of the present invention also provide a carrier carrying the above computer program.
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机程序, 包括程序指令, 当该程序指令被 终端执行时, 使得该终端可执行上述方法。  The embodiment of the invention further provides a computer program, comprising program instructions, when the program instruction is executed by the terminal, so that the terminal can execute the above method.
本发明实施例还提供一种载有上述计算机程序的载体。 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法、 装置和系统, 基站向 终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或 在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式的增强的 CQI 表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调制方式的 常规 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表。通过携带有所使用表格相关信息的配 置信令, 实现了基站和终端更高阶的调制处理, 解决了现有通信系统无法支 持更高阶调制方式的问题。 附图概述 Embodiments of the present invention also provide a carrier carrying the above computer program. Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method, apparatus, and system, where a base station sends configuration signaling to a terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station is on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission. In the mode, an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode or a conventional table not supporting the M-order modulation mode is selected, and the enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table supporting the M-th order modulation mode. The conventional table is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table that does not support the M-order modulation mode. By carrying the configuration signaling with the relevant information of the use form, the higher order modulation processing of the base station and the terminal is realized, and the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher order modulation mode is solved. BRIEF abstract
图 1为本发明的实施例二十二提供的一种高阶编码调制处理方法的流程 图;  1 is a flow chart of a high-order code modulation processing method according to Embodiment 22 of the present invention;
图 2为本发明的实施例二十三提供的一种高阶编码调制处理装置的结构 示意图;  2 is a schematic structural diagram of a high-order code modulation processing apparatus according to Embodiment 23 of the present invention;
图 3为本发明的实施例二十三提供的又一种高阶编码调制处理装置的结 构示意图。  Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing still another structure of a high-order code modulation processing device according to a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention.
本发明的较佳实施方式 Preferred embodiment of the invention
目前通信系统的常规表格无法支持更高阶调制方式, 也没有解决具体的 高阶调制方式增强表格和常规表格的配置使用问题, 比如, 何种情况配置高 阶调制方式的增强表, 何种情况使用常规表格。  At present, the conventional table of the communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode, and the specific high-order modulation mode enhancement table and the configuration of the regular table are not solved. For example, when to configure the enhanced table of the high-order modulation mode, what kind of situation Use a regular form.
为了解决上述问题,本发明的实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法、 装置和系统, 基站通过向终端发送配置信令, 表明所述基站在预定义的资源 集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选 择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式 的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M 本发明的实施例中所涉及的 256QAM新表包括支持 256QAM的新 CQI和 MCS和 TBS表; 现有协议表格包括现有协议的 CQI和 MCS和 TBS表。 下 文中将结合附图对本发明的实施例进行详细说明。 需要说明的是, 在不冲突 的情况下, 本申请中的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互任意组合。 In order to solve the above problem, an embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method, apparatus, and system. The base station sends configuration signaling to a terminal, indicating that the base station is on a predefined resource set and/or in advance. Define an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation mode in the transmission mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode. The enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS supporting the M-order modulation mode. Table, the conventional table is not supported. The 256QAM new table involved in the embodiment of the present invention includes a new CQI supporting 256QAM and MCS and TBS tables; existing protocol forms include CQI and MCS and TBS tables for existing protocols. Embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be noted that, in the case of no conflict, the features in the embodiments and the embodiments in the present application may be arbitrarily combined with each other.
实施例一至八为基站侧的配置实施例。 Embodiments 1 to 8 are configuration examples on the base station side.
实施例一: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中,基站在预定义的资源集合上配置 256QAM增强表格或者常规表格的使用。  Embodiment 1 The embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the base station configures the use of a 256QAM enhanced table or regular form on a predefined set of resources.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 基站向终端发送配置信令, 所述信令配置了 子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。基站向终端发送高层配置参数 1 (通过配置信令发 送) , 该参数在子帧集合 0上选择支持 256QAM调制方式的增强表格, 所述 增强表格为支持 256QAM的 CQI表, MCS表和 TBS表; 基站向终端发送高 层配置参数 2(通过配置信令发送 ),该参数对子帧集合 1选择不支持 256QAM 的常规表格, 所述常规表格为 LTE Rel-11版本标准 36.213的 CQI表, MCS 表和 TBS表。该方法在高信干噪比的子帧上配置 256QAM表格的使用,在低 信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好实现自适应编 码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 1 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 0, where the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM; The base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 2 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM for the subframe set 1. The conventional table is a CQI table of the LTE Rel-11 version standard 36.213, an MCS table and TBS table. The method configures a 256QAM table on a high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on a low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby implementing adaptive coding modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 基站向终端发送配置信令, 所述信令配置了 子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。 基站向终端发送高层配置参数(通过配置信令发 送) , 该参数在子帧集合 1上选择支持 256QAM调制方式的增强表格, 所述 增强表格为支持 256QAM的 CQI表和 MCS表; 基站不对子帧集合 0配置参 数,子帧集合 0选择不支持 256QAM的常规表格,所述常规表格为 LTE Rel-11 版本标准 36.213 的 CQI表和 MCS表。 该方法在高信干噪比的子帧上配置 256QAM的使用, 在低信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。  Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The base station sends a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 1, the enhanced table is a CQI table and an MCS table supporting 256QAM; The set 0 configuration parameter, the subframe set 0 selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM, which is the CQI table and the MCS table of the LTE Rel-11 version standard 36.213. The method configures 256QAM on the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, 基站向终端发送配置信令, 所述信令配置了 子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。基站向终端发送高层配置参数 1 (通过配置信令发 送) , 该参数对子帧集合 0选择支持 256QAM调制方式的增强表格, 所述增 强表格为支持 256QAM的 CQI表; 基站不对子帧集合 1配置参数, 子帧集合 1选择不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 所述常规表格为 LTE Rel-11版本协议 36.213的 CQI表。 该方法在高信干噪比的子帧上配置 256QAM的使用, 在低 信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好实现自适应编 码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。 Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 1 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode for the subframe set 0, the enhanced table is a CQI table supporting 256QAM; the base station does not configure the subframe set 1 Parameter, subframe set 1 selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM, which is an LTE Rel-11 version protocol CQI table of 36.213. The method configures the use of 256QAM on the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
子实施例四: 该实施例中, 基站向终端发送配置信令, 所述信令配置了 子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。基站向终端发送高层配置参数 1和参数 2 (通过配 置信令发送) , 分别在子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1上选择支持 256QAM调制方 式的增强表格, 所述增强表格为支持 256QAM的 MCS表。 该方法在高信干 噪比的子帧上配置 256QAM的使用, 在低信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。  Sub-in Embodiment 4: In this embodiment, the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The base station sends a high-level configuration parameter 1 and a parameter 2 (transmitted by configuration signaling) to the terminal, and selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 0 and the subframe set 1, respectively, and the enhanced table is an MCS table supporting 256QAM. The method configures 256QAM on the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
子实施例五: 该实施例 4叚定如下场景: Donor eNodeB和 Relay node之间 Sub-Embodiment 5: This embodiment 4 determines the following scenario: between Donor eNodeB and Relay node
In-band部署。 Donor eNodeB和 Relay node之间进行通信时 ,对于 backhaul link 子帧选择支持 256QAM的增强表格。 该方法利用可能的高信干噪比环境配置 使用 256 QAM。 In-band deployment. When communicating between the Donor eNodeB and the Relay node, an enhanced table supporting 256QAM is selected for the backhaul link subframe. This method utilizes a possible high-signal-to-noise ratio environment configuration using 256 QAM.
实施例二: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中,基站通过 X2接口接收相邻小区发送的相对窄带发送功率( RNTP )信令。 根据 RNTP, 基站在受干扰较大的频域资源上选择配置不支持 256QAM的常 规表格, 在干扰较小的频域资源上选择配置支持 256QAM的增强表格。 该方 法在高信干噪比的频域资源上配置 256QAM的使用, 在低信干噪比的频域资 源上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统 频语效率。 Embodiment 2: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the base station receives relatively narrowband transmit power (RTP) signaling sent by the neighboring cell through the X2 interface. According to the RNTP, the base station selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM on the frequency domain resource with large interference, and selects an enhanced table that supports 256QAM on the frequency domain resource with less interference. The method configures the use of 256QAM on the frequency domain resources of the high-signal-to-noise ratio, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the frequency-domain resources of the low-signal-to-noise ratio, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system frequency efficiency. .
实施例三: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中,对于预定的天线端口配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM 的常规表格。 Embodiment 3: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table not supporting 256QAM is configured for a predetermined antenna port.
子实施例一: 该实施例中基站在天线端口 5, 7— 14上配置支持 256QAM 的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 在其他天线端口上配置不支持 256QAM的常规表格。该方案对基于 DMRS的下行传输配置支持 256QAM的 增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 Sub-Ath Embodiment: In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM on antenna ports 5, 7-14, and configures a regular table that does not support 256QAM on other antenna ports. The scheme supports 256QAM for DMRS-based downlink transmission configuration. Enhanced forms or regular forms that do not support 256QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例对天线端口 0— 3 , 5 , 7—14 配置支持 256QAM 的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。  Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for antenna ports 0-3, 5, 7-14.
实施例四: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中, 基站对于预定的传输层数集合配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 Embodiment 4: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for a predetermined set of transport layer numbers.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 基站发送高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 选择支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。当传输层数 rank < 2时, 调制和编码方式域和 /或上报 CQI基于所配置支持 256QAM的 增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格; 当 rank > 2时调制和编码方式域 和 /或上报 CQI基于不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 大于 2的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 2时层间干扰太大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted by configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM. When the number of transmission layers rank < 2, the modulation and coding mode field and/or the reported CQI are based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when rank > 2, the modulation and coding mode field and/or the reported CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM. Ranks greater than 2 do not use 256 QAM because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 2, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 基站发送高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 选择支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。当传输层数 rank≤ 4时, 调制和编码方式域和 /或上 CQI基于所配置支持 256QAM的增 强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格; 当 rank >4时调制和编码方式域和 / 或上报 CQI基于不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 对大于 4的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 4时层间干扰太大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。  Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table that supports 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM. When the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 4, the modulation and coding mode field and/or the upper CQI is based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when the rank > 4 modulation and coding mode field and/or reporting CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, 基站发送高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 选择支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。当传输层数 rank≤ 6时, 调制和编码方式域和 /或上 CQI基于所配置支持 256QAM的增 强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格; 当 rank > 6时调制和编码方式域和 / 或上报 CQI基于不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 对大于 6的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 6时层间干扰太大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。 子实施例四: 该实施例中, 基站发送高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 选择支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。当传输层数 rank≤ 7时, 调制和编码方式域和 /或上 CQI基于所配置支持 256QAM的增 强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格; 当 rank >7时调制和编码方式域和 / 或上报 CQI基于不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 对大于 7的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 7时层间干扰太大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。 Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table that supports 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM. When the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 6, the modulation and coding mode field and/or the upper CQI is based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when rank > 6 modulation and coding mode fields and/or reporting CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM. Sub-Embodiment 4: In this embodiment, the base station sends high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling) to select an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM. When the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 7, the modulation and coding mode field and/or the upper CQI is based on an enhanced table configured to support 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM; when rank > 7 modulation and coding mode fields and/or reporting CQI Based on regular forms that do not support 256QAM. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 7, because the inter-layer interference is too large when rank is greater than 7, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
实施例五: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中,不同的 CSI process可以通过配置信令独立地配置支持 256QAM的增强表 格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 针对不同的 CSI process独立配置支持 256QAM 的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM 的常规表格是因为每一个 CSI process对应着不同的信道条件, 针对信道条件好的配置 256 QAM表格, 而 信道差的配置不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 从而更好实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。 Embodiment 5: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, different CSI processes can independently configure an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM through configuration signaling. Independently configure 256QAM enhanced tables or regular tables that do not support 256QAM for different CSI processes because each CSI process corresponds to different channel conditions, 256 QAM tables are configured for good channel conditions, and channel difference configuration does not support 256QAM. The regular table is used to better achieve adaptive code modulation and improve system spectral efficiency.
实施例六: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中, 基站对于预定下行传输方式下的终端配置 256QAM增强表格或者现有协 议常规表格的使用。 Embodiment 6: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the base station configures the use of the 256QAM enhanced table or the existing protocol regular table for the terminal in the predetermined downlink transmission mode.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对空间复用传输方式配置 256QAM增强表格或者现有协议表格的使用; 对非 空间复用传输方式不通过信令配置, 非空间复用传输方式使用常规表格。 该 方案主要考虑在信道条件较好时使用空间复用传输方式和 256 QAM共同提 升峰值速率和频谱效率。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station configures a 256QAM enhanced table or an existing protocol table for the spatial multiplexing transmission mode by using a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling); Let the configuration, non-spatial multiplexing transmission use a regular table. The scheme mainly considers the use of spatial multiplexing transmission mode and 256 QAM to improve peak rate and spectrum efficiency when channel conditions are good.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对空间复用和非空间复用的传输方式配置 256QAM增强表格或者现有协议表 格的使用。该配置主要考虑尽可能地拓宽 256 QAM的应用场景,提升峰值速 率, 提高系统吞吐量。 子实施例三: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对基于 DMRS的传输方式配置 256QAM增强表格或者现有协议表格的使用 , 对非 DMRS传输方式不通过信令配置,非 DMRS传输方式使用常规表格。该 方案考虑基于 DMRS的传输方式有如下优点: DMRS之间干扰小,基于 DMRS 的信道估计更准确; 对于 DMRS传输方式, 码本的选择更灵活。 因此对于基 于 DMRS的传输, 传输块可以获得更高的信噪比, 更适合 256 QAM的使用。 而基于 CRS的传输方式存在 CRS与数据之间干扰的问题, 影响信道估计准 确性。 Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station configures the 256QAM enhanced table or the use of the existing protocol table for the spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing transmission modes through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted by configuration signaling). This configuration mainly considers to broaden the application scenario of 256 QAM as much as possible, improve the peak rate, and improve system throughput. Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the base station configures a 256QAM enhanced table or an existing protocol table for the DMRS-based transmission mode by using a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling), and does not pass the signaling configuration for the non-DMRS transmission mode. Non-DMRS transmission methods use regular forms. The scheme considers the DMRS-based transmission method to have the following advantages: The interference between the DMRS is small, and the channel estimation based on the DMRS is more accurate; for the DMRS transmission mode, the selection of the codebook is more flexible. Therefore, for DMRS-based transmission, the transmission block can obtain a higher signal-to-noise ratio, which is more suitable for the use of 256 QAM. The CRS-based transmission method has the problem of interference between CRS and data, which affects channel estimation accuracy.
实施例七: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中, 基站对预定的下行传输模式配置支持 256QAM 的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 Embodiment 7: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for a predetermined downlink transmission mode.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对除了传输模式 1/2/6以外的传输模式配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不 支持 256QAM的常规表格;传输模式 1/2/6使用不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 且不需要通过基站配置。 该配置相当于只对空间复用下行传输方式配置 256QAM增强表格或者现有协议表格的使用。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for a transmission mode other than the transmission mode 1/2/6 through a high-level configuration parameter (transmitted by configuration signaling); Mode 1/2/6 uses a regular table that does not support 256QAM and does not need to be configured through the base station. This configuration is equivalent to configuring the 256QAM enhanced table or the existing protocol table only for the spatial multiplexing downlink transmission mode.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对传输模式 7— 10配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规 表格; 其他传输模式使用不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 且不需要通过基站配 置。该配置相当于只对基于 DMRS的下行传输配置支持 256QAM的增强表格 或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。  Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for the transmission mode 7-10 through the high-level configuration parameter (transmitted through configuration signaling); the other transmission mode uses the 256QAM that does not support 256QAM. Regular forms, and do not need to be configured through the base station. This configuration is equivalent to an enhanced table that supports 256QAM only for DMRS-based downlink transmission configuration or a regular table that does not support 256QAM.
子实施例三: 该实施例通过配置信令对所有传输模式配置支持 256QAM 的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 该配置主要考虑尽可能地拓宽 256 QAM的应用场景, 提升峰值速率, 提高系统吞吐量。  Sub-Embodiment 3: This embodiment configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for all transmission modes by configuration signaling. This configuration mainly considers to broaden the application scenario of 256 QAM as much as possible, improve the peak rate, and improve system throughput.
实施例八: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施例 中, 基站对于预定的 DCI format配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。 Embodiment 8: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the base station supports an enhanced table of 256QAM for a predetermined DCI format configuration or does not support Regular form of 256QAM.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对 DCI format 2/2A/2B/2C/2D五种格式配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不 支持 256QAM的常规表格;其他 DCI format使用不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 且不通过高层参数配置。上述的 DCI format指示 MIMO类型的 PDSCH传输, 对所述的 DCI format选择 256QAM增强表格, 可以在信道条件较好的情况下 使用 MIMO和 256 QAM共同提升峰值速率和频谱效率。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table not supporting 256QAM in five formats of DCI format 2/2A/2B/2C/2D through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling). Other DCI formats use regular tables that do not support 256QAM and are not configured through high-level parameters. The above DCI format indicates a MIMO type PDSCH transmission, and a 256QAM enhanced table is selected for the DCI format, and the peak rate and the spectrum efficiency can be improved by using MIMO and 256 QAM in a better channel condition.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对 DCI formatl/lX/2/2X配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM 的常规表格; 其他 DCI format使用不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 且不通过高 层参数配置。这里, DCI format IX代表 DCI format 1A/1B/1C/1D的任意组合; 可用于指示各种方式的 PDSCH传输, 对所述的 DCI format选择 256QAM增 强表格,可以尽可能地拓宽 256 QAM的应用场景,提升峰值速率和频谱效率, 提高系统吞吐量。  Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM for DCI formatl/lX/2/2X through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted through configuration signaling); other DCI formats are not used. Supports regular tables of 256QAM and does not pass high-level parameter configuration. Here, DCI format IX represents any combination of DCI format 1A/1B/1C/1D; can be used to indicate various manners of PDSCH transmission, select 256QAM enhanced table for the DCI format, and can broaden the application scenario of 256 QAM as much as possible Increase peak rate and spectral efficiency and increase system throughput.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, 基站通过高层配置参数(通过配置信令发送) 对 DCI formatl/2B/2C/2D四种格式配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格; 其他 DCI format使用不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 且 不通过高层参数配置。 该配置相当于对基于 DMRS的下行传输方式配置支持 256QAM的增强表格或者不支持 256QAM的常规表格。  Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the base station configures an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table that does not support 256QAM in four formats of DCI formatl/2B/2C/2D through high-level configuration parameters (transmitted by configuration signaling); other DCI The format uses a regular table that does not support 256QAM and is not configured through high-level parameters. This configuration is equivalent to configuring an enhanced table supporting 256QAM or a regular table not supporting 256QAM for DMRS-based downlink transmission.
实施例九至实施例十三为基站侧的调度实施例: 基站向终端发送下行控 制信令, 所述下行控制信令至少包括调制和编码方式域(/MCS ) 。 Embodiments 9 to 13 are scheduling embodiments on the base station side: The base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least a modulation and coding mode field (/ MCS ).
实施例九: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Embodiment 9: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例中,基站向终端发送 RRC信令, 配置了 256 QAM 增强表格, 且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 6。 当传输层数 rank < 6时, /MCS基于 256 QAM增强表格, 基站根据 /MCS和下行传输资源 块数目 NPRB查增强的 TBS表获取下行传输的 TBS,利用 TBS进行编码调制, 发送下行数据; 当 Rank > 6时, 基站根据 /MCS和下行传输资源块数目 NPRB 查常规的 TBS表获取下行传输的 TBS,利用 TBS进行编码调制,发送下行数 据。 对大于 6的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 6时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM所需的信噪比。 Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station sends RRC signaling to the terminal, configures a 256 QAM enhanced table, and assumes that the maximum number of downlink transmission layers that 256QAM can support is 6. When the number of transmission layers rank < 6, / MCS is based on 256 QAM enhanced tables, base stations based on / MCS and downlink transmission resources The number of blocks of the NPRB is enhanced to obtain the TBS of the downlink transmission, and the TBS is used for code modulation and transmission, and the downlink data is transmitted. When Rank > 6, the base station obtains the downlink transmission according to the / MCS and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks N PRB. The TBS uses TBS for code modulation and transmits downlink data. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the inter-layer interference is larger when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 基站通过 RRC信令配置了 256 QAM增强表 格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 8。则对于传输层数 rank ≤ 8, /MCS基于 256 QAM增强表格,基站根据 /MCS和下行传输资源块数目 NPRB 查增强的 TBS表获取下行传输的 TBS,利用 TBS进行编码调制,发送下行数 据。 Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station configures a 256 QAM enhanced table through RRC signaling, and assumes that the maximum downlink transmission layer that 256QAM can support is 8. Then, for the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 8, / MCS is based on the 256 QAM enhancement table, the base station obtains the TBS of the downlink transmission according to the enhanced TBS table of the / MCS and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks N PRB , performs coding modulation using the TBS, and transmits the downlink data.
实施例十: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。  Embodiment 10: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例假设两个传输块的两层传输, RRC信令配置了 256 QAM增强表格。 两个传输块的 /MCS都基于 256 QAM增强表格。 该方案 用于信噪比条件较好时提升频谱效率。 Sub-Embodiment 1: This embodiment assumes two layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and RRC signaling configures a 256 QAM enhanced table. The / MCS of both transport blocks is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table. This scheme is used to improve spectral efficiency when the signal-to-noise ratio is good.
子实施例二: 该实施例假设两个传输块的八层传输, RRC信令配置了 Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment assumes eight layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and RRC signaling is configured.
256 QAM增强表格。 第一个传输块的 /MCS基于 256 QAM增强表格, 第二个 传输块的 /MCS基于常规表格; 或者第二个传输块的 /MCS基于 256 QAM增强 表格, 第一个传输块的 /MCS基于常规表格。 该方案考虑了两个传输块可能具 有不同的 SINR, 应分别确定是否使用支持 256QAM的表格。 256 QAM enhanced form. The / MCS of the first transport block is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table, the / MCS of the second transport block is based on a regular table; or the / MCS of the second transport block is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table, the / MCS of the first transport block is based Regular form. The scheme considers that two transport blocks may have different SINRs and should determine whether to use a table supporting 256QAM, respectively.
子实施例三: 该实施例假设一个传输块的两层传输, RRC signaling配置 了 256 QAM增强表格。 对该传输块使用 256 QAM增强表格。 该方案用于信 噪比条件较好时提升频谱效率。  Sub-Embodiment 3: This embodiment assumes a two-layer transmission of one transport block, and RRC signaling configures a 256 QAM enhanced table. Use 256 QAM enhanced tables for this transport block. This scheme is used to improve spectral efficiency when the signal-to-noise ratio is good.
子实施例四: 该实施例假设一个传输块的单层传输, RRC signaling配置 了 256 QAM增强表格。 但对该个传输块不使用 256 QAM增强表格。 该方案 考虑信噪比条件较差时没有必要釆用支持 256QAM的增强表格。  Sub-Embodiment 4: This embodiment assumes a single layer transmission of a transport block, and RRC signaling configures a 256 QAM enhanced table. However, the 256 QAM enhanced table is not used for this transport block. This scheme does not need to use an enhanced table supporting 256QAM when the signal-to-noise ratio condition is poor.
实施例十一: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Embodiment 11: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2D,基站通过 RRC 信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格。 高层配置 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 2和 set 3使用 256 QAM增强表格。 基站通过 PQI通知终端, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表。 当 PQI = 10 或者 11时 /MCS基于 256 QAM 5比特 MCS表; 当 PQI = 00或者 01时, /MCS 基于不支持 256 QAM 的常规表格。该方案重用 PQI比特实现 MCS表的动态 指示, 可以更好实现自适应编码调制; 而且不增加下行控制信息负载。 Sub-Ath Embodiment: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2D, and the base station passes the RRC. The signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables. The PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 2 and set 3 corresponding to the upper layer configuration PQI use the 256 QAM enhanced table. The base station notifies the terminal through the PQI, and the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table. When PQI = 10 or 11, /MCS is based on the 256 QAM 5-bit MCS table; when PQI = 00 or 01, / MCS is based on a regular table that does not support 256 QAM. The scheme reuses the PQI bit to implement dynamic indication of the MCS table, which can better implement adaptive code modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
子实施例二: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2且 rank = 1 , 基 站通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格。 基站通过第二个传输块新 数据指示域通知终端, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表。 当所 述新数据指示域等于 1时, /MCS基于增强的 5比特 MCS表, 等于 0时基于常 规 MCS表。 该方案重用新数据指示域实现 MCS表的动态指示, 可以更好实 现自适应编码调制; 而且不增加下行控制信息负载。 Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2 and rank = 1, and the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration. The base station notifies the terminal through the second transport block new data indication field, and the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table. When the new data indicates that the field is equal to 1, / MCS is based on the enhanced 5-bit MCS table, which is equal to 0 based on the regular MCS table. The scheme reuses the new data indicating domain to implement dynamic indication of the MCS table, which can better implement adaptive coding modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
子实施例三: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2A且 rank > 1 , 基 站通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格。 基站重用第二个传输块的 调制和编码方式域中 1比特通知终端, 两个传输块所述 /MCS基于增强的 5比 特 MCS表或者常规 MCS表。 第二个传输块的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特 作为相对于另一个传输块的差分 /MCS, 即第二个传输块的 /MCS用第一个传输 块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS求和得到。该方法在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况 下实现 MCS表的动态指示, 可以更好实现自适应编码调制。 Sub-Embodiment 3: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2A and rank > 1, and the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration. The base station reuses the 1-bit notification terminal in the modulation and coding mode domain of the second transport block, and the two transport blocks are/ MCS based on the enhanced 5-bit MCS table or the regular MCS table. The second transport block modulation and coding scheme field with respect to the remaining 4 bits as a differential / MCS another transmission block, i.e., / MCS differential / MCS a first transport block with a second transport block / MCS summation get. The method can realize the dynamic indication of the MCS table without increasing the load of the DCI format 2/2X, and the adaptive code modulation can be better realized.
子实施例四:该实施例中 ,基站通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM 的表格。 基站使用第一个码字冗余版本域 2 比特中的 1 比特用于指示第一 个码字 /MCS是基于增强的 5比特 MCS表格或者常规表格;使用第二个码字冗 余版本域 2 比特中的 1 比特用于指示第二个码字 /MCS是基于增强的 5比特 MCS表格还是常规表格。 当 RRC配置不支持 256QAM时, 按照现有协议进 行 DCI域的解释。 该方法在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况下实现 MCS 表的动态指示, 可以更好实现自适应编码调制。 Sub-Embodiment 4: In this embodiment, the base station semi-statically configures a table supporting 256 QAM through RRC signaling. The base station uses 1 bit of the first codeword redundancy version field 2 bits to indicate that the first codeword/ MCS is based on an enhanced 5-bit MCS table or a regular table; using the second codeword redundancy version field 2 The 1 bit in the bit is used to indicate whether the second codeword/ MCS is based on an enhanced 5-bit MCS table or a regular table. When the RRC configuration does not support 256QAM, the DCI domain is interpreted according to the existing protocol. This method can realize the dynamic coding of the MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X, and can realize adaptive code modulation better.
子实施例五:该实施例中,基站通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM 的表格。 基站使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 5比特 MCS表或 者常规表格。 该方法在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况下实现 MCS表的 动态指示, 可以更好实现自适应编码调制。 Sub-Embodiment 5: In this embodiment, the base station semi-statically configures a table supporting 256 QAM through RRC signaling. The base station uses the TPC command to inform the terminal that the / MCS is based on an enhanced 5-bit MCS table or a regular table. This method implements the MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X. Dynamic indication, better adaptive code modulation can be achieved.
实施例十二: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Embodiment 12: An embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2D,基站通过 RRC 信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM的表格。 高层配置 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 0和 set 1使用 256 QAM增强表格; 基站通过 PQI通知终端, /MCS基于 256 QAM 6比特 MCS表的前 32个或者后 32个等级。 当 PQI = 00或者 01时 /MCS基于 256 QAM 6比特 MCS表的前 32个等级; 当 PQI = 10或者 11时, /MCS基于 256 QAM 6比特 MCS表的后 32个等级。该方 案重用 PQI比特实现 6比特 MCS表的指示, 该表相比 5比特 MCS表有更细 化的码率颗粒度, 可以更好实现自适应编码调制; 而且不增加下行控制信息 负载。 Sub-Embodiment 1: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2D, and the base station semi-statically configures a table supporting 256 QAM through RRC signaling. The PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 0 and set 1 corresponding to the upper layer configuration PQI use the 256 QAM enhancement table; the base station notifies the terminal through the PQI, and the / MCS is based on the first 32 or the last 32 levels of the 256 QAM 6-bit MCS table. When PQI = 00 or 01 / MCS is based on the first 32 levels of the 256 QAM 6-bit MCS table; when PQI = 10 or 11, / MCS is based on the last 32 levels of the 256 QAM 6-bit MCS table. The scheme reuses the PQI bit to implement the indication of the 6-bit MCS table. The table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better implement adaptive code modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
子实施例二: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2且 rank = 1 , 基 站通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格。 基站使用第二个传输块的 新数据指示域中 1 比特结合第一个传输块的 5比特调制和编码方式域来指示 6比特的支持 256 QAM的 MCS增强表格。 该方法配置 6 比特的新 MCS表, 该表相比 5比特 MCS表有更细化的码率颗粒度,可以更好实现自适应编码调 制; 而且不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载。  Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2 and rank = 1, and the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration. The base station uses the new data of the second transport block to indicate that the 1 bit in the field is combined with the 5-bit modulation and coding mode field of the first transport block to indicate a 6-bit MCS enhanced table supporting 256 QAM. The method configures a 6-bit new MCS table, which has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better implement adaptive coding modulation; and does not increase the load of DCI format 2/2X.
子实施例三: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2A且 rank > 1 , 基 站通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格。 基站重用第二个传输块的 调制和编码方式域中 1比特结合第一个传输块的 5比特调制和编码方式域来 指示 6比特的支持 256QAM的新 MCS表, 第二个传输块的调制和编码方式 域中剩余 4比特指示相对于第一个传输块的差分 /MCS, 即二个传输块的 /MCS 用第一个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS求和得到,第二个传输块的 /MCS基于 6 比 特或者 5比特的新 MCS表。 该方法在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况下 配置 6 比特的 MCS表, 该表相比 5比特 MCS表有更细化的码率颗粒度, 可 以更好实现自适应编码调制。 Sub-Embodiment 3: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2A and rank > 1, and the base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration. The base station reuses the 1-bit modulation and coding mode field of the second transport block in combination with the 5-bit modulation and coding mode field of the first transport block to indicate a 6-bit new MCS table supporting 256QAM, and a modulation scheme of the second transport block. domain encoding with respect to the remaining 4 bits indicative of a first differential / MCS transport block, i.e., / MCS differential / MCS / MCS with a first transport block obtained by summing two transport blocks, a second transport blocks The / MCS is based on a 6-bit or 5-bit new MCS table. The method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of the DCI format 2/2X. The table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, and the adaptive code modulation can be better realized.
子实施例四: 该实施例假设 DCI format为 DCI format 2且 rank > 1。基站 通过 RRC信令半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格。 第一个和第二个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表。两个传输块的 /MCS釆用 10比特联合上报, 即 10个比特所能表示的 2的 10次方种情况中的任何一种都指示了两个传输 块 /MCS的一种组合。该方法在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况下配置 6 比 特的 MCS表, 该表相比 5比特 MCS表有更细化的码率颗粒度, 可以更好实 现自适应编码调制。 Sub-Embodiment 4: This embodiment assumes that the DCI format is DCI format 2 and rank > 1. The base station supports 256 QAM tables through RRC signaling semi-static configuration. First and second transport blocks /MCS is based on an enhanced 6-bit MCS table. The / MCS of the two transport blocks is jointly reported with 10 bits, that is, any of the 10 tenths of the 2 bits that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of the two transport blocks/MCS. The method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of the DCI format 2/2X. The table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, and the adaptive code modulation can be better realized.
子实施例五: 该实施例在 RRC signaling半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格 的情况下, 重用 DCI中的冗余版本域: 第一个码字的调制和编码方式域 5 比 特联合该码字冗余版本域 2 比特中的 1 比特用于指示 6 比特 MCS表, 第 一个码字的 MCS基于 6 比特新 MCS表; 第二个码字的调制和编码方式域 5 比特联合该码字冗余版本域的 1 比特指示 6 比特 MCS表, 第二个码字的 MCS基于 6 比特新 MCS表。 冗余版本域另一比特用来指示重传版本 0或 2。 当 RRC配置不支持 256QAM时, 按照现有协议进行 DCI域的解释。 该方法 在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况下配置 6 比特的 MCS表, 该表相比 5 比特 MCS表有更细化的码率颗粒度, 可以更好实现自适应编码调制。  Sub-Embodiment 5: This embodiment reuses the redundancy version field in the DCI in the case where the RRC signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables: Modulation and coding mode field of the first codeword 5 bits combined with the codeword redundancy 1 bit in the version field 2 bits is used to indicate a 6-bit MCS table, the MCS of the first codeword is based on a 6-bit new MCS table; the modulation and coding mode of the second codeword is 5 bits combined with the codeword redundancy version One bit of the field indicates a 6-bit MCS table, and the MCS of the second codeword is based on a 6-bit new MCS table. Another bit of the redundancy version field is used to indicate retransmission of version 0 or 2. When the RRC configuration does not support 256QAM, the DCI domain is interpreted according to the existing protocol. This method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X. This table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better achieve adaptive code modulation.
子实施例六: 该实施例在 RRC signaling半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格 的情况下, 重用 DCI中的冗余版本域: 第一个码字的调制和编码方式域 5 比 特联合该码字冗余版本域 2 比特中的 1 比特用于指示 6 比特 MCS表, 第 一个码字的 MCS基于 6 比特新 MCS表; 第二个码字的调制和编码方式域 5 比特联合第一个码字冗余版本域的前述比特指示 6 比特 MCS表, 第二个码 字的 MCS基于 6 比特新 MCS表。第一个码字冗余版本域另一比特用来指示 重传版本 0或 2。 当 RRC配置不支持 256QAM时, 按照现有协议进行 DCI 域的解释。该方法在不增加 DCI format 2/2X的负载情况下配置 6 比特的 MCS 表,该表相比 5比特 MCS表有更细化的码率颗粒度, 可以更好实现自适应编 码调制。  Sub-Embodiment 6: This embodiment reuses the redundancy version field in the DCI in the case where the RRC signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables: Modulation and coding mode field of the first codeword 5 bits combined with the codeword redundancy 1 bit in the version field 2 bits is used to indicate the 6-bit MCS table, the MCS of the first codeword is based on the 6-bit new MCS table; the modulation and coding mode of the second codeword is 5 bits combined with the first codeword redundancy The aforementioned bits of the remaining version field indicate a 6-bit MCS table, and the MCS of the second codeword is based on a 6-bit new MCS table. The first codeword redundancy version field is used to indicate the retransmission of version 0 or 2. When the RRC configuration does not support 256QAM, the DCI domain is interpreted according to the existing protocol. This method configures a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of DCI format 2/2X. This table has a finer granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, which can better achieve adaptive coding modulation.
子实施例七: 该实施例在 RRC signaling半静态配置支持 256 QAM表格 的情况下, 使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特 MCS表中的 前 32个或者后 32个等级。 该方案在不增加下行控制信息负载的情况下实现 6比特 MCS表的指示, 该表相比 5比特 MCS表有更细化的码率颗粒度, 可 以更好实现自适应编码调制。 子实施例十三: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Sub-Embodiment 7: This embodiment informs the terminal that the / MCS is based on the first 32 or the last 32 levels in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table using the TPC command in the case where the RRC signaling semi-static configuration supports 256 QAM tables. The scheme implements an indication of a 6-bit MCS table without increasing the load of the downlink control information. The table has a finer granularity of granularity than the 5-bit MCS table, and the adaptive coding modulation can be better realized. Sub-third embodiment: The embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例中,基站向终端发送 RRC信令, 配置了 256 QAM 增强表格, 且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 6。 当传输层数 rank 6时, 所述 CQI基于 256 QAM增强表格; 当 Rank > 6时基于常规表 格。 对大于 6的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 6时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM所需的信噪比。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the base station sends RRC signaling to the terminal, and configures a 256 QAM enhanced table, and assumes that the maximum downlink transmission layer supported by 256QAM is 6. When the number of layers is level 6, the CQI is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table; when Rank > 6, it is based on a regular table. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the rank interference is greater when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例中,基站向终端发送 RRC信令, 配置了 256 QAM 增强表格, 且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 4。 当传输层数 rank≤ 4时,所述 CQI基于 256 QAM增强表格;当 Rank > 4时基于常规表格。 对大于 4的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 4时层间干扰较大, 码 字可能达不到使用 256 QAM所需的信噪比。  Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the base station sends RRC signaling to the terminal, and configures a 256 QAM enhanced table, and assumes that the maximum downlink transmission layer supported by 256QAM is 4. When the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 4, the CQI is based on a 256 QAM enhanced table; when Rank > 4, it is based on a regular table. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
实施例十四至十七为基站侧的反馈实施例: 基站接收终端的信道状态信 息, 所述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI。 Embodiments 14 to 17 are feedback embodiments of the base station side: The base station receives channel state information of the terminal, and the channel state information includes at least CQI.
实施例十四: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 本实施 例针对周期上报 CSI。 Embodiment 14: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. This embodiment reports CSI for the period.
子实施例一:该实施例假设 RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM,且 rank = 1 , 针对周期上报 UCI , 终端通过 UCI域新增 1比特通知基站, 所述 CQI基于增 强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表。 当该比特等于 0时, 所述 CQI基于常规 4比特 CQI表, 等于 1时基于支持 256QAM的 4比特增强 CQI表。 该方案实现 CQI 表的动态指示, 可更好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供参考; 且 不影响 UCI的解调性能。  Sub-Embodiment 1: This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM, and rank = 1 . For periodic reporting of UCI, the terminal notifies the base station by adding 1 bit to the UCI domain, and the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table. When the bit is equal to 0, the CQI is based on a conventional 4-bit CQI table, and when equal to 1, is based on a 4-bit enhanced CQI table supporting 256QAM. The scheme implements dynamic indication of the CQI table, which can better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not affect the demodulation performance of the UCI.
子实施例二:该实施例假设 RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM,且 rank = 2 , 针对周期上报 UCI,使用第二个传输块差分 CQI的 1比特通知基站,所述 CQI 基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表。 当该比特等于 0时, 所述 CQI基于常规 4比特 CQI表, 等于 1时基于支持 256QAM的 4比特增强 CQI表。 而第二个 传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示。 该方案实现 CQI表的动态指示, 可更好地指 示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供参考; 且不增加 UCI负载, 不影响 UCI解调性能。 Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM, and rank = 2, for periodic reporting UCI, using 1 bit of the second transport block differential CQI to inform the base station, whether the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or conventional CQI table. When the bit is equal to 0, the CQI is based on a conventional 4-bit CQI table, and when equal to 1, is based on a 4-bit enhanced CQI table supporting 256QAM. And the second The transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI. The scheme implements the dynamic indication of the CQI table, can better indicate the channel condition, and provides a reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load, and does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
子实施例三: 该实施例中 , RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM, 假设 rank = 4 , 且终端通过釆用 PUCCH reporting type 1 ( PUCCH报告类型 1 )反馈子带 CQL 终端上报 CQI时新增 1比特通知基站, 两个传输块的所述 CQI基于增 强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表。 当该比特等于 0时, 所述 CQI基于常规 4比特 CQI表, 等于 1时基于支持 256QAM的 4比特增强 CQI表。 该方案实现 CQI 表的动态指示, 可更好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供参考; 且 不影响 UCI解调性能。  Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM, assuming rank = 4, and the terminal adds a 1-bit notification when the CQI is reported by the CQL terminal by using the PUCCH reporting type 1 (PUCCH report type 1) feedback sub-band. The base station, the CQI of the two transport blocks is based on an enhanced CQI table or a conventional CQI table. When the bit is equal to 0, the CQI is based on a conventional 4-bit CQI table, and when equal to 1, is based on a 4-bit enhanced CQI table supporting 256QAM. The scheme implements a dynamic indication of the CQI table, which can better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
子实施例四: 该实施例中假设下行传输模式 10配置 8天线传输且 R C signaling配置了 256 QAM。终端使用 PTI动态指示支持 256QAM的 CQI表或 常规 CQI表。 PTI = 0时表示使用 256QAM 4比特的新 CQI表; PTI = 1时表 示使用现有协议的 CQI表。 实现动态指示, 使反馈更灵活。  Sub-Embodiment 4: In this embodiment, it is assumed that the downlink transmission mode 10 is configured with 8 antenna transmissions and R C signaling is configured with 256 QAMs. The terminal uses the PTI dynamic indication to support the 256QAM CQI table or the regular CQI table. A PTI = 0 indicates a new CQI table using 256QAM 4 bits; a PTI = 1 indicates a CQI table using the existing protocol. Implement dynamic instructions to make feedback more flexible.
实施例十五: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 本实施 例针对周期上 "¾ CSI。 Embodiment 15: An embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method. This embodiment is directed to "3⁄4 CSI" on the cycle.
子实施例一:该实施例假设 RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM,且 rank = 1。 针对周期上报 UCI, CQI表为支持 256QAM的 5比特 CQI表,且 CQI采用 5 比特上报。 针对 rank = 1配置 5 比特 CQI表并使用 5 比特上报 CQI, 可更 好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供参考。  Sub-Embodiment 1: This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM and rank = 1. For the periodic reporting of UCI, the CQI table is a 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM, and the CQI is reported by 5 bits. Configuring a 5-bit CQI table for rank = 1 and reporting the CQI with 5 bits can better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM.
子实施例二:该实施例假设 RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM,且 rank > 1。 针对周期上报 UCI, 第一个码字的 CQI基于 5比特 CQI表, 采用 5 比特上 报, 第二个码字 CQI基于支持 256 QAM的 5 比特 或 4 比特新 CQI表, 或 者现有协议 CQI表, 使用 2比特差分 CQI上报。 该方案釆用 5比特 CQI表 使 CQI有更细化的码率粒度, 更好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM 提供参考; 且不增加 UCI负载。  Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM and rank > 1. For periodic reporting of UCI, the CQI of the first codeword is based on a 5-bit CQI table, which is reported by 5 bits, and the second codeword CQI is based on a 5-bit or 4-bit new CQI table supporting 256 QAM, or an existing protocol CQI table, Reported using a 2-bit differential CQI. The scheme uses a 5-bit CQI table to make the CQI have a finer code rate granularity, better indicate the channel condition, and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM, 假设 rank = 4, 且终端通过釆用 PUCCH reporting type 1 ( PUCCH报告类型 1 )反馈子带 CQL 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5比特 CQI表。 第一个传 输块的 CQI用 5比特表示, 第二个传输块的 CQI用 4比特差分 CQI表示。该 方案新增 2比特分别支持两个码字的 5比特 CQI上报,釆用 5比特 CQI表使 CQI有更细化的码率粒度, 更好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供 参考; 且不影响 UCI解调性能。 Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM, assuming rank = 4, and the terminal passes the PUCCH reporting type 1 (PUCCH report type 1) to feed the sub-band CQL. The CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are all based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table. The CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits, and the CQI of the second transport block is represented by a 4-bit differential CQI. The scheme adds a 2-bit CQI report that supports two codewords respectively, and uses a 5-bit CQI table to make the CQI have a finer code rate granularity, better indicating the channel condition, and providing a reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; And does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
子实施例四: 该实施例中, RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM, 假设 rank = 2。 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5比特 CQI表。 第一个传输 块和第二个传输块的 CQI用 7比特表示, 即 7个比特所能表示的 2的 7次方 种情况中的任何一种都指示了两个传输块 CQI的一种组合。釆用 5比特 CQI 表使 CQI有更细化的码率粒度, 更好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM 提供参考; 且不增加 UCI负载, 不影响 UCI解调性能。  Sub-Embodiment 4: In this embodiment, RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM, assuming rank = 2. The CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table. The CQI of the first transport block and the second transport block is represented by 7 bits, that is, any one of the 7th powers of 2 that can be represented by 7 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks CQI. . The 5-bit CQI table is used to make the CQI have a more refined code rate granularity, better indicate the channel condition, and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load, and does not affect the UCI demodulation performance.
子实施例五: 该实施例中假设下行传输模式 10配置 8天线传输且 RRC signaling 配置了 256 QAM。 终端使用 PTI通知基站, 所述 CQI基于支持 256QAM的 5比特 CQI表的前 16个或者后 16个等级。 PTI = 0时表示使用 256QAM 的 5比特 CQI表的前 16个等级; PTI = 1时表示使用后 16个等级。 该方案釆用 5比特 CQI表使 CQI有更细化的码率粒度,更好地指示信道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供参考; 且不增加 UCI负载。  Sub-Embodiment 5: In this embodiment, it is assumed that the downlink transmission mode 10 configures 8 antenna transmission and RRC signaling configures 256 QAM. The terminal notifies the base station using the PTI, which is based on the first 16 or the last 16 levels of the 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM. PTI = 0 indicates the first 16 levels of the 5-bit CQI table using 256QAM; PTI = 1 indicates the 16 levels after use. The scheme uses a 5-bit CQI table to make the CQI have a finer code rate granularity, better indicate the channel condition, and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM; and does not increase the UCI load.
实施例十六: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Embodiment 16: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例假设 RRC signaling配置了 256 QAM。针对非周期 上报 UCI, 宽带 CQI的 CQI表为支持 256QAM的 5比特 CQI表, 且 CQI釆 用 5 比特上报; 子带 CQI的 CQI表为支持 256QAM的 5比特 CQI表, 且 CQI釆用 3 比特上报。 该方案考虑到对于非周期 CQI上报, 上行时频资源并 不那么稀缺, 可使用 5 比特的 CQI表并加 1 比特 上报 CQI, 更好地指示信 道情况, 为基站调度 256 QAM提供参考。  Sub-Embodiment 1: This embodiment assumes that RRC signaling is configured with 256 QAM. For the non-period reporting UCI, the CQI table of the wideband CQI is a 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM, and the CQI is reported by 5 bits; the CQI table of the sub-band CQI is a 5-bit CQI table supporting 256QAM, and the CQI is reported by 3 bits. . The scheme considers that for the aperiodic CQI reporting, the uplink time-frequency resources are not so scarce. The CQI table of 5 bits can be used and the CQI can be reported by 1 bit to better indicate the channel condition and provide reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM.
实施例十七: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 子实施例一: 该实施例假设两个传输块的两层传输,基站通过 RRC信令 配置了 256 QAM。 两个传输块的 CQI上报都基于支持 256 QAM的表格。 该 方案用于信噪比条件较好时更好地指示信道情况,为基站调度 256 QAM提供 参考。 Embodiment 17: An embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method. Sub-Embodiment 1: This embodiment assumes two layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and the base station configures 256 QAM through RRC signaling. The CQI reporting of both transport blocks is based on a table that supports 256 QAM. The scheme is used to better indicate the channel condition when the signal to noise ratio condition is good, and provides a reference for the base station to schedule 256 QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例假设两个传输块的八层传输,基站通过 RRC信令 配置了 256 QAM。 第一个传输块的 CQI基于支持 256 QAM的新 CQI表格, 第二个传输块基于现有协议的 CQI表格; 或者第一个传输块的 CQI基于现有 协议 CQI表格, 第二个传输块基于支持 256QAM的新 CQI表格。 该方案考 虑了两个码字可能具有不同的 SINR, 不一定都需要使用支持 256QAM的表 格。  Sub-Embodiment 2: This embodiment assumes eight layers of transmission of two transport blocks, and the base station configures 256 QAM through RRC signaling. The CQI of the first transport block is based on a new CQI table supporting 256 QAM, the second transport block is based on the CQI table of the existing protocol; or the CQI of the first transport block is based on the existing protocol CQI table, and the second transport block is based on Support for new CQI forms for 256QAM. The scheme considers that two codewords may have different SINRs, and not all of them need to use a table that supports 256QAM.
实施例十八至二十一为终端侧实施例。 Embodiments 18 to 21 are terminal side embodiments.
实施例十八: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。  Embodiment 18: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。 终端接收基站发送的高层配置参数 1 , 该参数 在子帧集合 0上选择支持 256QAM调制方式的增强表格, 所述增强表格为支 持 256QAM的 CQI表, MCS表和 TBS表; 终端接收基站发送的高层配置参 数 2, 该参数对子帧集合 1选择不支持 256QAM的常规表格, 所述常规表格 为 LTE Rel-11版本标准 36.213的 CQI表, MCS表和 TBS表。 终端在子帧集 合 0接收到的 /MCS基于基站配置的增强表格, 反馈的子帧集合 0的 CQI基于 基站配置的增强表格;在子帧集合 1接收到的 /MCS基于基站配置的常规表格, 反馈的子帧集合 1的 CQI基于基站配置的常规表格。 该方法在高信干噪比的 子帧上配置 256QAM表格的使用, 在低信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。 Sub-Ath Embodiment: In this embodiment, the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The terminal receives the high-level configuration parameter 1 sent by the base station, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode on the subframe set 0, where the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM; Configuration parameter 2, which selects a regular table that does not support 256QAM for subframe set 1, which is a CQI table, an MCS table and a TBS table of the LTE Rel-11 version standard 36.213. The / MCS received in the subframe set 0 is based on the enhanced table of the base station configuration, the CQI of the fed back subframe set 0 is based on the enhanced table configured by the base station; the / MCS received in the subframe set 1 is based on the regular table configured by the base station, The CQI of the fed back subframe set 1 is based on a regular table of base station configurations. The method configures a 256QAM table on a high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on a low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。 终端接收基站发送的高层配置参数, 该参数 对子帧集合 0选择支持 256QAM调制方式的增强表格, 所述增强表格为支持 256QAM的 CQI表、 MCS表和 TBS表。 终端在子帧集合 0接收到的 /MCS基 于基站配置的增强表格,反馈的子帧集合 0的 CQI基于基站配置的增强表格; 在子帧集合 1接收到的 /MCS基于基站配置的常规表格, 反馈的子帧集合 1的 CQI基于基站配置的常规表格。 该方法在高信干噪比的子帧上配置 256QAM 的使用, 在低信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好 实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。 Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The terminal receives the high-level configuration parameter sent by the base station, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode for the subframe set 0, where the enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM. The / MCS received by the terminal in subframe set 0 is based on an enhanced table configured by the base station, and the CQI of the fed back subframe set 0 is based on an enhanced table configured by the base station; The / CMS received in subframe set 1 is based on a conventional table of base station configurations, and the CQI of the fed back subframe set 1 is based on a conventional table of base station configurations. The method configures the use of 256QAM in the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1。 终端接收基站发送的高层配置参数, 该参数 对子帧集合 1选择支持 256QAM调制方式的增强表格, 所述增强表格为支持 256QAM的 CQI表、 MCS表和 TBS表。 终端在子帧集合 1接收到的 /MCS基 于基站配置的增强表格,反馈的子帧集合 1的 CQI基于基站配置的增强表格; 在子帧集合 0接收到的 /MCS基于基站配置的常规表格, 反馈的子帧集合 0的 CQI基于基站配置的常规表格。 该方法在高信干噪比的子帧上配置 256QAM 的使用, 在低信干噪比的子帧集合上配置不支持 256QAM的表格, 从而更好 实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统频谱效率。 Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling configures a subframe set 0 and a subframe set 1. The terminal receives a high-level configuration parameter sent by the base station, and the parameter selects an enhanced table supporting the 256QAM modulation mode for the subframe set 1. The enhanced table is a CQI table, an MCS table, and a TBS table that support 256QAM. The / MCS received in the subframe set 1 is based on the enhanced table of the base station configuration, the CQI of the fed back subframe set 1 is based on the enhanced table configured by the base station; the / MCS received in the subframe set 0 is based on the regular table configured by the base station, The CQI of the fed back subframe set 0 is based on a regular table of base station configurations. The method configures the use of 256QAM in the high-signal-to-noise ratio subframe, and configures a table that does not support 256QAM on the low-signal-to-noise ratio subframe set, thereby better implementing adaptive code modulation and improving system spectral efficiency.
实施例十九: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 该实施 例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令对 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 2和 set 3选择使用 256 QAM增强表格, 对 set 0和 set 1选 择使用不支持 256 QAM的常规表格。终端接收基站发送的下行控制信息, 包 括 PQI。 当 PQI = 10或者 1 1时 /MCS基于 256 QAM 4比特 MCS表; 当 PQI = 00或者 01时, /MCS基于不支持 256 QAM 的常规表格。 该方案重用 PQI比特 实现 MCS表的动态指示,可以更好实现自适应编码调制; 而且不增加下行控 制信息负载。 Embodiment 19: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method. In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling uses the 256 QAM enhanced table for the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set 2 and set 3, and selects the use of the 256 QAM for the set 0 and set 1 Regular form. The terminal receives downlink control information sent by the base station, including the PQI. When PQI = 10 or 1 1 / MCS is based on the 256 QAM 4-bit MCS table; when PQI = 00 or 01, / MCS is based on a regular table that does not support 256 QAM. The scheme reuses the PQI bit to implement dynamic indication of the MCS table, which can better implement adaptive code modulation; and does not increase the downlink control information load.
实施例二十: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Embodiment 20: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 2。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank和下行传输资源块 数目 WPRB, 当传输层数 rank < 2时, /MCS基于 256 QAM增强的 MCS表, 终端根据 /MCS和 NPRB查增强的 TBS表获取 TBS;当 rank > 2时基于常规表格, 终端根据 /MCS和 WPRB查常规的 TBS表获取 TBS。对大于 2的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 2时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。 Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 2. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks WPRB by de-DCI. When the number of transmission layers rank < 2, the / MCS is based on the MCS table enhanced by 256 QAM, and the terminal is enhanced according to / MCS and NPRB. The TBS table gets the TBS; when the rank > 2 is based on the regular table, The terminal acquires the TBS according to the regular TBS table of the /MCS and WPRB. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 2 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 2, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 4。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank和下行传输资源块 数目 WPRB, 当传输层数 rank≤4时, /MCS基于 256 QAM增强的 MCS表, 终 端根据 /MCS和 WPRB查增强的 TBS表获取 TBS; 当 rank > 4时基于常规表格, 终端根据 /MCS和 WPRB查常规的 TBS表获取 TBS。对大于 4的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 4时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。 Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 4. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks WPRB by de-DCI. When the number of transmission layers rank≤4, the / MCS is based on the 256 QAM enhanced MCS table, and the terminal is enhanced according to the /MCS and WPRB. The TBS table acquires the TBS; when rank > 4, based on the regular table, the terminal acquires the TBS according to the /MCS and WPRB check conventional TBS tables. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 6。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank和下行传输资源块 数目 NPRB , 当传输层数 rank≤6时, /MCS基于 256 QAM增强的 MCS表, 终 端根据 /MCS和 WPRB查增强的 TBS表获取 TBS; 当 rank > 6时基于常规表格, 终端根据 /MCS和 WPRB查常规的 TBS表获取 TBS。对大于 6的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 6时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。 Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 6. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank and the number of downlink transmission resource blocks NPRB by de-DCI. When the number of transmission layers is rank≤6, the / MCS is based on the 256 QAM enhanced MCS table, and the terminal is enhanced according to the /MCS and WPRB. The TBS table acquires the TBS; when rank > 6, based on the regular table, the terminal acquires the TBS according to the /MCS and WPRB check conventional TBS tables. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the inter-layer interference is larger when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
实施例二十一: 本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法。 Embodiment 21: Embodiments of the present invention provide a high-order code modulation processing method.
子实施例一: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 2。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank。 终端向基站发送 上行控制信息,至少包括 CQI。 当传输层数 rank < 2时, CQI基于 256 QAM 增强的 CQI表; 当 rank > 2时基于常规 CQI表。 对大于 2的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 2时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。  Sub-Embodiment 1: In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 2. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers by solving the DCI. The terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least CQI. When the number of transmission layers rank < 2, the CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 2, it is based on the regular CQI table. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 2 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 2, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例二: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 4。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank。 终端向基站发送 上行控制信息, 至少包括 CQI。 当传输层数 rank≤4时, CQI基于 256 QAM 增强的 CQI表; 当 rank > 4时基于常规 CQI表。 对大于 4的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 4时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。 Sub-Embodiment 2: In this embodiment, the terminal receives configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the signaling is configured A 256 QAM enhancement table is placed, and the maximum number of downlink transmission layers that 256QAM can support is four. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers rank by deciding the DCI. The terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least a CQI. When the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 4, the CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 4, it is based on the conventional CQI table. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 4 because the inter-layer interference is greater when rank is greater than 4, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例三: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 6。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank。 终端向基站发送 上行控制信息, 至少包括 CQI。 当传输层数 rank≤6时, CQI基于 256 QAM 增强的 CQI表; 当 rank > 6时基于常规 CQI表。 对大于 6的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 6时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。  Sub-Embodiment 3: In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 6. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers by solving the DCI. The terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least CQI. When the number of transmission layers rank ≤ 6, CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 6, it is based on the regular CQI table. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 6, because the rank interference is greater when rank is greater than 6, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
子实施例四: 该实施例中, 终端接收基站发送的配置信令, 所述信令配 置了 256 QAM增强表格,且假设 256QAM所能支持的最大下行传输层数为 7。 终端接收基站的下行数据并通过解 DCI获取传输层数 rank。 终端向基站发送 上行控制信息, 至少包括 CQI。 当传输层数 rank≤7时, CQI基于 256 QAM 增强的 CQI表; 当 rank > 7时基于常规 CQI表。 对大于 7的 rank不使用 256 QAM, 是因为 rank大于 7时层间干扰较大, 码字可能达不到使用 256 QAM 所需的信噪比。  Sub-invention 4: In this embodiment, the terminal receives the configuration signaling sent by the base station, and the signaling is configured with a 256 QAM enhanced table, and the maximum downlink transmission layer that the 256QAM can support is 7. The terminal receives the downlink data of the base station and obtains the number of transmission layers by solving the DCI. The terminal sends uplink control information to the base station, including at least CQI. When the number of transmission layers is rank ≤ 7, CQI is based on the 256 QAM enhanced CQI table; when rank > 7, it is based on the regular CQI table. 256 QAM is not used for ranks greater than 7, because the rank interference is greater when rank is greater than 7, and the codeword may not reach the signal-to-noise ratio required to use 256 QAM.
实施例二十二 Example twenty two
本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理方法, 使用该方法完成高阶 编码调制处理的流程如图 1所示, 包括:  The embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing method, and the process of using the method to complete high-order code modulation processing is as shown in FIG. 1 , which includes:
步骤 101、 基站向终端发送配置信令;  Step 101: The base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal.
本步骤中, 基站发送的配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 / 或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调制方 式的常规 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, M≥ 256且为正整数。 In this step, the configuration signaling sent by the base station indicates that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode. The enhanced table is an enhanced support for the M-order modulation mode. The CQI table and/or the MCS table and/or the TBS table, which is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, M ≥ 256 and is a positive integer.
此外, 所述基站在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合上, 和 /或对 除预定义传输方式之外的其他传输方式下的终端配置其他信令, 所述其他配 置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方 式的常规表格。  In addition, the base station configures other signaling on the other resource set except the predefined resource set, and/or the terminal in other transmission modes except the predefined transmission mode, where the other configuration signaling indication Select an enhanced table that supports M-order modulation or a regular table that does not support M-order modulation.
此外, 所述基站还可以在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合上, 令来表明选择不支持 M阶调制方式的常规表格。  In addition, the base station may also indicate, on a set of resources other than the predefined set of resources, to select a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode.
所述预定义的资源集合, 包括以下至少之一:  The predefined set of resources includes at least one of the following:
预定义的子帧集合, 预定义的频域资源集合, 预定义的下行天线端口集 合, 预定义的传输层数集合。  A predefined set of subframes, a predefined set of frequency domain resources, a predefined set of downstream antenna ports, and a predefined set of transport layers.
所述预定义的子帧集合, 包括以下至少之一:  The predefined set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
基站配置的子帧集合, 固定的子帧集合。  A set of subframes configured by the base station, a fixed set of subframes.
所述基站配置的子帧集合包括以下至少之一:  The subframe set configured by the base station includes at least one of the following:
子帧集合 0 ( subframe set 0 ) ,子帧集合 1 ( subframe set 1 ) , MBSFN 子帧, 对于 elMTA, 由系统消息块 1 ( SIB1 ) 配置的下行子帧集合, elMTA 中 TDD DL子帧中由 UL子帧切换而来的 DL子帧集合, Relay场景中的 backhaul子帧集合, Relay场景中的 Access子帧集合, D2D通讯中的 D2D子 帧集合。  Subframe set 0 (subframe set 0), subframe set 1 (MB set), MBSFN sub-frame, for elMTA, downlink subframe set configured by system message block 1 (SIB1), in TDD DL subframe in elMTA The DL subframe set that is switched from the UL subframe, the backhaul subframe set in the relay scenario, the Access subframe set in the Relay scenario, and the D2D subframe set in the D2D communication.
所述固定的子帧集合, 包括以下至少之一:  The fixed set of subframes includes at least one of the following:
由子帧号《 = 0, 1 , ... ... , 9对应的子帧的一个或者多个构成的子帧集 合,  a set of subframes consisting of one or more subframes corresponding to the subframe number " = 0, 1, ..., 9,
TDD帧结构中的一般子帧,  a general subframe in the TDD frame structure,
TDD帧结构中, 特殊子帧配置 0, 1 , ... ... , 9中的一种或者多种配置的 In the TDD frame structure, one or more of the special subframe configurations 0, 1 , ..., 9 are configured.
DwPTS0 DwPTS 0
以下为基站可釆用的几种配置方式: 对于子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1 ,基站分别选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的 增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; The following are several configurations that can be used by the base station: For the subframe set 0 and the subframe set 1, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于子帧集合 0,基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 对于子帧集合 1 , 基站选择配置不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格;  For the subframe set 0, the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 1, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于子帧集合 1 ,基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 对于子帧集合 0, 基站选择配置不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格;  For the subframe set 1 , the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode; for the subframe set 0, the base station selects and configures a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于 Relay场景中的 backhaul子帧集合和 Access子帧集合, 基站分别选 择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表 格;  For the backhaul subframe set and the Access subframe set in the relay scenario, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于 elMTA中 TDD DL子帧中由 UL子帧切换而来的 DL子帧集合和由 系统消息块 1( SIB1 )消息配置的下行子帧集合,基站分别选择配置支持 M 阶 调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。  For the DL subframe set switched by the UL subframe in the TDD DL subframe in the elMTA and the downlink subframe set configured by the System Message Block 1 (SIB1) message, the base station separately selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation mode or Regular tables with M-order modulation are not supported.
所述预定义的频域资源集合, 包括频谱资源中不被 X2信令指示的可能 受相邻基站高度干扰的资源。  The predefined set of frequency domain resources includes resources in the spectrum resources that are not interfered by X2 signaling and may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations.
对于由 X2信令指示的可能受相邻基站高度干扰的频率资源, 所述基站 选择配置不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格;  For frequency resources indicated by X2 signaling that may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations, the base station selects a configuration table that does not support the M-order modulation mode;
对于除可能受相邻基站高度干扰的频率资源之外的其他频率资源, 所述 基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常 规表格。  For other frequency resources than frequency resources that may be highly interfered by neighboring base stations, the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-th order modulation scheme or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation scheme.
所述预定义的下行天线端口集合的子集包括以下至少之一:  The subset of the predefined set of downlink antenna ports includes at least one of the following:
{天线端口 5 } , {天线端口 7至 7 +;? } , {天线端口 8 +;? 至 14 } , {天线端口 0至 3 } , 其中, p 为正整数, 且 0≤/?≤6。  {Antenna port 5 }, {Antenna port 7 to 7 +;? } , {Antenna port 8 +;? to 14 } , {Antenna port 0 to 3 } , where p is a positive integer and 0 ≤ /? ≤ 6 .
所述预定义的传输层数集合为满足 1≤rank≤ 的所有正整数的集合,其 中, rank为传输层数, 即所述传输层数集合的元素, 为 M 阶调制方式所支 持的最大传输层数, 且 为正整数。  The predefined set of transport layer numbers is a set of all positive integers satisfying 1≤rank≤, where rank is the number of transport layers, that is, the elements of the set of transport layer numbers, which are the maximum transmission supported by the M-order modulation mode. The number of layers, and is a positive integer.
所述预定义的传输方式, 包括以下至少之一: 空间复用传输方式; The predefined transmission mode includes at least one of the following: Spatial multiplexing transmission method;
非空间复用传输方式, 至少包括以下之一:  The non-spatial multiplexing transmission method includes at least one of the following:
发射分集传输方式, 单天线端口传输方式;  Transmit diversity transmission mode, single antenna port transmission mode;
基于 DMRS的传输方式;  DMRS based transmission method;
基于 CRS的传输方式。  CRS-based transmission method.
步骤 102、 终端接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信令;  Step 102: The terminal receives downlink data, and acquires configuration signaling sent by the base station.
本步骤中, 终端根据该配置信令确定基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在 预定义的传输方式下选择的表格。 并根据预装的约定(如: 与基站釆用同样 的调制处理方式进行调制处理, 或与基站釆用不同的调制处理方式并将所釆 用的调制处理方式通知基站) 。  In this step, the terminal determines, according to the configuration signaling, a table selected by the base station on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. According to the pre-installed convention (such as: using the same modulation processing method as the base station, the modulation processing is performed, or a different modulation processing method is used with the base station, and the used modulation processing method is notified to the base station).
步骤 103、 所述终端向所述基站发送信道状态信息;  Step 103: The terminal sends channel state information to the base station.
本步骤中, 终端向基站发送信道状态信息, 在该信道状态信息中携带有 In this step, the terminal sends channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information carries
CQI。 CQI.
根据终端所釆用的调制处理方式是否与基站在配置信令中所表明的配置 一致, 在信道状态信息的 UCI域中还可以携带相关通知信息, 具体如下: According to whether the modulation processing mode used by the terminal is consistent with the configuration indicated by the base station in the configuration signaling, the UCI domain of the channel state information may also carry related notification information, as follows:
1、 终端釆用与基站配置信令中相同的调制处理方式; 1. The terminal uses the same modulation processing method as that in the base station configuration signaling;
此时, 终端可以选择只在信道状态信息中携带 CQI; 也可以选择在信道 状态信息中通过信道状态信息的 UCI域通知基站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI 表或者常规 CQI表。  At this time, the terminal may choose to carry the CQI only in the channel state information; or may select to notify the base station that the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table by using the UCI field of the channel state information in the channel state information.
2、 终端釆用与基站配置信令中不同的调制处理方式;  2. The terminal uses different modulation processing methods than the base station configuration signaling;
此时, 终端需在信道状态信息中通过信道状态信息的 UCI域通知基站所 述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表。  At this time, the terminal needs to notify the base station that the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table through the UCI field of the channel state information in the channel state information.
步骤 104、 所述基站接收所述终端发送的信道状态信息;  Step 104: The base station receives channel state information sent by the terminal.
当基站选择配置了支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时:  When the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports M-order modulation:
对于传输层数 rank < L, 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表, 其中 L为 M 阶 调制方式所支持的最大传输层数, 且 L为正整数;  For the number of transmission layers rank < L, the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation mode, and L is a positive integer;
对于 rank > L, 所述 CQI基于常规 CQI表。 当所述基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格, 且终端上报两个传输块的 CQI时, 所述两个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 CQI 表, 或所述两个传输块中仅有一个传输块的 CQI基于增强的 CQI表。 For rank > L, the CQI is based on a conventional CQI table. When the base station indicates, by using the configuration signaling, that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, and the terminal reports the CQI of the two transport blocks, the CQIs of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced CQI table, or The CQI of only one of the two transport blocks is based on the enhanced CQI table.
所述基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时, 对于周期上报 CSI, 该方法至少包括以下之一:  When the base station indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected by using the configuration signaling, the method includes at least one of the following:
当传输层数 rank = 1时, 终端上报 CQI时通过 UCI域的 1比特通知基站 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表;  When the number of transmission layers rank = 1, when the terminal reports the CQI, the base station is notified by the 1 bit of the UCI field, and the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 终端上报 CQI时通过第二个传输块差分 CQI的 1比特通知基站第一个和 /或第二个传输块的所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是 常规 CQI表, 所述第二个传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示;  When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, when the terminal reports the CQI, it is notified by the 1 bit of the second transport block differential CQI that the CQI of the first and/or second transport block of the base station is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table. The second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 对于只上报 CQI而不上报 PMI的 PUCCH上报 类型, 终端上报 CQI时通过 UCI域新增的 1比特通知基站, 第一个传输块所 述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表,  When the number of transmission layers is >1, for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI and does not report the PMI, when the terminal reports the CQI, the base station notifies the base station by adding 1 bit in the UCI domain, and the CQI of the first transmission block is based on the enhanced CQI table. Or a regular CQI table,
和 /或所述终端通过 UCI域新增的另一比特通知基站所述第二个传输块 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表;  And/or the terminal notifying the base station of the second transport block by another bit added by the UCI domain, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
终端通过信道状态信息的 PTI域通知基站, 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表 还是常规 CQI表;  The terminal notifies the base station by using a PTI field of channel state information, whether the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
当传输层数 rank = 1时,所述增强的 CQI表为 5比特 CQI表,且所述 CQI 釆用 5比特表示;  When the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the enhanced CQI table is a 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI 釆 is represented by 5 bits;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个或两个传输块的 CQI基于增强的 5比特 When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the CQI of the first or two transport blocks is based on the enhanced 5 bits.
CQI表, 第一个传输块的 CQI用 5 比特表示; 第二个传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示; In the CQI table, the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits; the second transport block is represented by a 2-bit differential CQI;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5 比特 CQI表。 两个传输块的 CQI釆用 7比特联合上报, 即 7个比特所能表示 的 2的 7次方种情况中的任何一种都指示了两个传输块 CQI的一种组合; 当传输层数 rank > 1时, 对于只上报 CQI而不上报 PMI的 PUCCH上报 类型, 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 第一个传 输块的 CQI用 5比特表示, 第二个传输块的 CQI用 4比特差分 CQI表示; 终端通过信道状态信息的 PTI域通知基站, 所述 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表中的集合 A和 B,所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 5比特 CQI表中 的等级, A和 B互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 5比特 CQI表。 When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table. The CQI of two transport blocks is jointly reported by 7 bits, that is, any one of the 7th powers of 2 that can be represented by 7 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks CQI; When rank > 1, the CQI of the first and second transport blocks is based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports the CQI without reporting the PMI, and the CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits. The CQI of the second transport block is represented by a 4-bit differential CQI; The terminal informs the base station through a PTI field of channel state information based on sets A and B in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, the elements of the set A or B coming from the level in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, A and B Mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
当所述基站通过配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时,对 于非周期上报 CSI, 具体包括如下上报方式:  When the base station indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected by using the configuration signaling, the reporting of the CSI for the non-period includes the following reporting manners:
新增 1比特用于通知基站, 宽带 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI 表;  A new 1 bit is added to inform the base station whether the wideband CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table;
新增 1比特用于通知基站, 子带 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI 表;  Add 1 bit to inform the base station, whether the subband CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the regular CQI table;
宽带 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 且釆用 5比特表示;  The wideband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table and is represented by 5 bits;
子带 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 且釆用 X个比特表示, 所述 X > 3 且为正整数;  The subband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and is represented by X bits, the X > 3 being a positive integer;
步骤 105、 所述基站向所述终端发送下行控制信令;  Step 105: The base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal.
本步骤中, 所述下行控制信令至少包括 /MCSIn this step, the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS .
根据基站所釆用的调制处理方式是否与步骤 101 中所配置的相同, 本步 骤中, 可选的, 还可通过下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通知所述终端 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表, 具体如下:  According to whether the modulation processing mode used by the base station is the same as that configured in step 101, in this step, optionally, the terminal may be notified by the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling. An enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table is as follows:
1、 基站所釆用的调制处理方式与步骤 101中所配置的相同;  1. The modulation processing method used by the base station is the same as that configured in step 101;
此时, 基站可通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通知所述终 端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表, 也可以不在所述下行控制信 令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI中携带所使用表格的相关信息。 At this time, the base station may notify the terminal that the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table by using the DCI domain or the C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling, or may not be in the DCI domain of the downlink control signaling or The C-RNTI carries information about the forms used.
2、 基站所釆用的调制处理方式与步骤 101中所配置的不同;  2. The modulation processing method used by the base station is different from that configured in step 101;
此时, 基站需要通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通知所述 终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表。 At this time, the base station needs to notify the terminal/ MCS based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table by using the DCI domain or the C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling.
本步骤中所涉及的 DCI域至少包括以下之一:  The DCI domain involved in this step includes at least one of the following:
新数据指示 ( New data indicator ) 域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令。 当基站配置选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时,对于传输层数 rank≤ L, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表, 其中 L为 M 阶调制方式所支持的最大传 输层数, 且 L为正整数; 对于 rank > L, 所述 /MCS基于常规 MCS表。 New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command. When the base station configuration selects an enhanced table supporting the M-order modulation mode, the number of transmission layers is rank ≤ L, the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation mode, and L is a positive integer; for rank > L, the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table.
当基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时,该 方法还至少包括以下之一:  When the base station indicates, by using the configuration signaling, that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, the method further includes at least one of the following:
对于两个传输块的下行传输, 两个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 MCS表; 对于两个传输块的下行传输, 一个传输块的 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表, 另一个传输块的 /MCS基于常规 MCS表; For downlink transmission of two transport blocks, the / MCS of both transport blocks are based on the enhanced MCS table; for the downlink transmission of two transport blocks, the / MCS of one transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table, and the other transport block/ The MCS is based on a conventional MCS table;
对于单个传输块的下行传输, 该传输块的 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或者 常规 MCS表。 For downlink transmission of a single transport block, the / MCS of the transport block is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table.
当所述基站根据所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格 时, 该方法还至少包括以下之一:  When the base station indicates, according to the configuration signaling, that an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected, the method further includes at least one of the following:
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank = 1时, 所述基站通 过第二个传输块新数据指示域通知所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还 是常规 MCS表; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the base station notifies the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table by using the second transport block new data indication field;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 所述基站通 过第 ,个传输块调制和编码方式域中 1比特通知所述终端第 ,个传输块和 /或 另一个传输块所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 第 I个传输块 的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特作为相对于另一个传输块的差分 /MCS, 即第 I 个传输块的 /MCS用另一个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS求和得到; ζ· =2或者 1; 当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 所述基站通 过第 ,个传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特通知所述终端第 ,个传输块或两个传输 块所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 第 I个传输块冗余版本域 中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本, , =1或者 2; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station notifies the terminal of the first transmission block and/or another transmission by using 1 bit in the first transmission block modulation and coding mode field. the block / MCS MCS table based on the enhanced or conventional MCS table, the I-th block transmission modulation and coding scheme field with respect to the remaining 4 bits as a differential / MCS another transmission block, i.e., / MCS transport blocks I, Obtained by / MCS of another transport block and differential/ MCS ; ζ·=2 or 1; when the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station passes the first transport block 1 bit in the redundancy version field informs the terminal of the first transport block or two transport blocks, the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table, and the other 1 bit in the first transport block redundancy version field is used for Indicate two redundant versions, , =1 or 2;
对于 DCI format 2D, 所述基站使用 PQI通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 高层在现有 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set中配置指示增强的 MCS表或者常规 MCS表, 或者 PQI仅 用于指示增强的 MCS表或者常规 MCS表而不再指示 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; 所述基站使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 具体地, TPC命令在指示 TPC的同时也指示增强的 MCS表或者常 规 MCS表; For the DCI format 2D, the base station uses the PQI to inform the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table, and the upper layer configures the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI. Table, or PQI is only used to indicate an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table and no longer indicates PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; The base station uses the TPC command to notify the terminal whether the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table. Specifically, the TPC command indicates the enhanced MCS table or the regular MCS table while indicating the TPC;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank = 1时, 单个传输块 的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由第二个传 输块新数据指示 ( New data indicator ) 域的 1比特和第一个传输块调制和 编码方式 i或的 5比特组成; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the / MCS of a single transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are indicated by the new data of the second transport block ( New data indicator) 1 bit of the field and the first transmission block modulation and coding mode i or 5 bits;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第 个传输 块的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由另一个 传输块调制和编码方式域中 1比特和第 I个传输块调制和编码方式域的 5比 特组成, 另一个传输块的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特作为相对于第 ,个传 输块的差分 /MCS, 即另一个传输块的 /MCS用第 I个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS 求和得到; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are modulated and encoded by another transport block. 1 bit in the domain and 5 bits of the first transport block modulation and coding mode field, the remaining 4 bits of the modulation and coding mode field of the other transport block as the difference / MCS relative to the first transport block, ie another transmission / MCS with the I-th / MCS differential / MCS transport block summing block;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个和第 二个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 两个传输块的 /MCS釆用 10 比特联合上报, 即 10个比特所能表示的 2的 10次方种情况中的任何一种都 指示了两个传输块 /MCS的一种组合; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the / MCS of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, and the / MCS of the two transport blocks uses 10 bits. Joint reporting, that is, any one of the 10 tenths of 2 that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks/ MCS ;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第 个传输 块的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由第 I个 传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特联合调制和编码方式域的 5比特组成, 第 ,个传 输块冗余版本域中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本, , =1或者 2;  When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the first transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which is represented by the first transport block redundancy version. The 5-bit joint modulation and coding mode field consists of 5 bits in the domain, and the other 1 bit in the first transmission block redundancy version field is used to indicate two redundancy versions, =1 or 2;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 两个传输块 的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 对于两个传输块, 该 6比特都由第 I个传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特联合调制和编码方式域的 5 比特组成,第 z个传输块冗余版本域中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本; z =l 或者 2;  When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and are represented by 6 bits. For the two transport blocks, the 6 bits are all The first transmission block redundancy version domain consists of 5 bits of the 1-bit joint modulation and coding mode field, and the other 1 bit of the z-th transmission block redundancy version field is used to indicate two redundancy versions; z = l or 2 ;
对于 DCI format 2D, 使用 PQI通知终端, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特 MCS表中的集合 A或者 B, 所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 6比特 MCS 表中的等级, A和 B互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 6比特 MCS表。 由高层在现有 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set中配置指 示集合 A或者 B,或者 PQI仅用于指示集合 A或者 B而不再指示 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; For DCI format 2D, using PQI notify the terminal, the / MCS based on the enhanced MCS table 6 bits in set A or B, the set of 6-bit MCS table element A or B from the enhancement of the level of, A, and B Mutually exclusive, and the sum of A and B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table. The indication set A or B is configured by the upper layer in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI, or the PQI is only used to indicate the set A or B and no longer indicates the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特 MCS表中的集合 A 或者 B,所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 6比特 MCS表中的等级, A和 B 互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 6比特 MCS表, 具体地, TPC命令在 指示 TPC的同时也指示集合 A或者 B; Notifying the terminal using the TPC command that the / MCS is based on the set A or B in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, the elements of the set A or B are from the level in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and A And B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table, specifically, the TPC command indicates the set A or B while indicating the TPC;
当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI对 PDCCH的 CRC进行加扰时所述 /MCS基于 增强的 MCS表, 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI加或减 j对 PDCCH的 CRC进行 加扰时所述 /MCS基于常规的 MCS表, 其中, j为正整数; When a preconfigured C-RNTI on the CRC PDCCH for scrambling the / MCS MCS table based on the enhanced, when using the preconfigured C-RNTI plus or minus CRC PDCCH j of the scrambling / MCS Based on a conventional MCS table, where j is a positive integer;
当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI对 PDCCH的 CRC进行加扰时, 所述 /MCS基 于常规的 MCS表; 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI加或减 j对 PDCCH的 CRC进 行加扰时, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表。 When the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using a pre-configured C-RNTI, the / MCS is based on a conventional MCS table; when the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using a pre-configured C-RNTI plus or minus j, / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table.
步骤 106、 终端接收基站发送的下行控制信令。  Step 106: The terminal receives downlink control signaling sent by the base station.
实施例二十三 Example twenty-three
本发明实施例提供了一种高阶编码调制处理装置, 其结构如图 2所示, 包括:  The embodiment of the present invention provides a high-order code modulation processing device, and the structure thereof is as shown in FIG. 2, including:
第一配置模块 201 , 设置为向终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所 述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制 方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格,所述增强表格即 为支持 M阶调制方式的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常  The first configuration module 201 is configured to send configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. Selecting a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, that is, an enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table supporting the M-th order modulation mode, the
M > 256且为正整数。 M > 256 and is a positive integer.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
第二配置模块 202, 设置为在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合 所述其他配置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。 The second configuration module 202 is configured to set the other configuration signaling in addition to the predefined resource set to indicate that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the selection is not supported. A regular table of M-order modulation methods.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
信道状态信息接收模块 203 , 设置为接收所述终端的信道状态信息, 所 述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, , 在所述信道状态信息的 UCI域携带表明所 述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表的信息。  The channel state information receiving module 203 is configured to receive channel state information of the terminal, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and carry a CQI table or a conventional CQI indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI in the UCI domain of the channel state information. Table information.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
控制信令下发模块 204, 设置为向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下 行控制信令至少包括 /MCS, 通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通 知所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包 括以下之一: The control signaling sending module 204 is configured to send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and notify the terminal by using a DCI domain or a C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling The / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, the DCI domain comprising at least one of the following:
New data indicator域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令。  New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
图 2所示的高阶编码调制处理装置可集成于基站中, 由基站完成相应功 能。  The high-order code modulation processing device shown in Fig. 2 can be integrated in the base station, and the corresponding functions are performed by the base station.
本发明实施例还提供了另一种高阶编码调制处理装置, 其结构如图 3所 示, 包括: Another embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing device, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 3, and includes:
配置信令获取模块 301 , 设置为接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信 令, 所述配置信令表明在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义的传输方式下选 择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者指示选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规 表格, M≥ 256且为正整数。  The configuration signaling obtaining module 301 is configured to receive downlink data, and obtain configuration signaling sent by the base station, where the configuration signaling indicates that the M-th order modulation mode is selected to be supported on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. The enhanced table or indication selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, M ≥ 256 and is a positive integer.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
信道状态信息发送模块 302, 设置为向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所 述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 通过所述信道状态信息的 UCI域通知所述基 站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表。  The channel state information sending module 302 is configured to send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and notify the base station that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular by using a UCI domain of the channel state information. CQI table.
较佳的, 该装置还包括:  Preferably, the device further comprises:
控制信令接收模块 303 , 设置为接收所述基站发送的下行控制信令, 所 述下行控制信令至少包括 /MCS,通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI 得知所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括以下 之一: The control signaling receiving module 303 is configured to receive downlink control signaling sent by the base station, where the downlink control signaling includes at least / MCS , and the DCI domain or C-RNTI that passes the downlink control signaling Knowing that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
新数据指示域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令。  New data indicates the domain, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command.
图 3所示的高阶编码调制处理装置可集成于终端中, 由终端完成相应功 6匕  The high-order code modulation processing device shown in FIG. 3 can be integrated in the terminal, and the corresponding work is completed by the terminal.
J 匕。  J 匕.
本发明实施例还提供了一种高阶编码调制处理系统, 包括基站和终端; 所述基站, 包括如图 2所示的高阶编码调制处理装置, 设置为向所述终 端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在0 预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M 阶调制方式的增强的 CQI 表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调制方式的 常规 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, M≥ 256且为正整数; The embodiment of the present invention further provides a high-order code modulation processing system, including a base station and a terminal. The base station includes a high-order code modulation processing device as shown in FIG. 2, and is configured to send configuration signaling to the terminal. The configuration signaling indicates that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a zero predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-th order modulation mode, the enhancement. The table is an enhanced CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table supporting the M-order modulation mode, which is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS that does not support the M-order modulation mode. Table, M ≥ 256 and is a positive integer;
所述终端, 包括如图 3所示的高阶编码调制处理装置, 设置为接收下行5 数据, 获取所述基站发送的所述配置信令。  The terminal includes a high-order code modulation processing device, as shown in FIG. 3, configured to receive downlink 5 data, and obtain the configuration signaling sent by the base station.
较佳的, 所述基站, 还设置为在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集 令,所述其他配置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。 Preferably, the base station is further configured to allocate other resources than the predefined resource set, and the other configuration signaling indicates that the enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode is selected or the M-order modulation mode is not selected. Regular form.
0 较佳的, 所述终端, 还设置为向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所述信道 状态信息至少包括 CQI, 通过所述信道状态信息的 UCI域通知所述基站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表; Preferably, the terminal is further configured to send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information includes at least a CQI, and notify, by the UCI domain of the channel state information, that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI. Table or regular CQI table;
所述基站, 还设置为接收所述终端发送的信道状态信息。  The base station is further configured to receive channel state information sent by the terminal.
较佳的, 所述基站, 还设置为向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下行5 控制信令至少包括 /MCS, 通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通知 所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括 以下之一: Preferably, the base station is further configured to send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink 5 control signaling includes at least / MCS , and the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling is notified by the The terminal/ MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a regular MCS table, and the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
New data indicator域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令; 所述终端, 还设置为接收所述下行控制信令。 New data indicator field, PQI, redundancy version field, TPC command; The terminal is further configured to receive the downlink control signaling.
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机程序, 包括程序指令, 当该程序指令被 基站执行时, 使得该基站可执行上述方法。 Embodiments of the present invention also provide a computer program, including program instructions, that when executed by a base station, cause the base station to perform the above method.
本发明实施例还提供一种计算机程序, 包括程序指令, 当该程序指令被 终端执行时, 使得该终端可执行上述方法。  The embodiment of the invention further provides a computer program, comprising program instructions, when the program instruction is executed by the terminal, so that the terminal can execute the above method.
本发明实施例还提供一种载有上述计算机程序的载体。  Embodiments of the present invention also provide a carrier carrying the above computer program.
本发明的实施例提供的高阶编码调制处理装置和系统, 能够与本发明的 实施例所提供的一种高阶编码调制处理方法相结合, 基站向终端发送配置信 令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义传输方 式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常 规表格,所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表 和 /或 TBS表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调制方式的常规 CQI表和 / 或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表。 通过携带有所使用表格相关信息的配置信令, 实现 了基站和终端更高阶的调制处理, 解决了现有通信系统无法支持更高阶调制 方式的问题。 本发明的实施例所提供的技术方案通过在高信噪比环境下合理 配置支持 M阶调制方式( M大于等于 256 ) 的 CQI/MCS/TBS表的使用, 灵 活地反馈信道状态以及调度使用高阶调制方式, 在兼容现有无线传输网络基 础上支持了高阶调制, 可以更好的实现自适应编码调制, 提高系统峰值速率 和频谱效率。 The high-order code modulation processing apparatus and system provided by the embodiments of the present invention can be combined with a high-order code modulation processing method provided by an embodiment of the present invention, and the base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling is Indicating that the base station selects an enhanced table supporting the M-th order modulation mode on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode or selects a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation mode, where the enhanced table supports the M-order An enhanced CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table of a modulation scheme, which is a conventional CQI table and/or an MCS table and/or a TBS table that does not support the M-order modulation scheme. The higher-order modulation processing of the base station and the terminal is realized by carrying configuration signaling with information related to the use of the table, and the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher-order modulation mode is solved. The technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention can flexibly feedback the channel state and the scheduling use by appropriately configuring the CQI/MCS/TBS table supporting the M-th order modulation mode (M is greater than or equal to 256) in a high SNR environment. The order modulation mode supports high-order modulation on the basis of compatibility with existing wireless transmission networks, which can better realize adaptive code modulation and improve system peak rate and spectrum efficiency.
通过釆用本发明实施例的方案,可以合理地配置 M阶调制方式的使用( M 大于等于 256 ) , 为 M阶调制方式的使用提供适合的信干噪比条件; 在不增 加信令开销的同时可以灵活充分反馈信道状态, 可以灵活地调度使用 M阶调 制方式。 总之, 本发明实施例方案很好地支持 M阶调制方式的使用, 提高无 线通信系统的频谱效率和数据传输峰值速率。 本领域普通技术人员可以理解上述实施例的全部或部分步骤可以使用计 算机程序流程来实现,所述计算机程序可以存储于一计算机可读存储介质中, 所述计算机程序在相应的硬件平台上(如系统、 设备、 装置、 器件等)执行, 在执行时, 包括方法实施例的步骤之一或其组合。 By using the solution of the embodiment of the present invention, the use of the M-th order modulation mode (M is greater than or equal to 256) can be reasonably configured to provide a suitable signal to interference and noise ratio condition for the use of the M-th order modulation mode; without increasing signaling overhead At the same time, the channel state can be fully and flexibly fed back, and the M-order modulation mode can be flexibly scheduled. In summary, the solution of the embodiment of the present invention well supports the use of the M-th order modulation mode, and improves the spectrum efficiency and the peak rate of data transmission of the wireless communication system. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that all or part of the steps of the above embodiments may be implemented using a computer program flow, which may be stored in a computer readable storage medium, such as on a corresponding hardware platform (eg, The system, device, device, device, etc. are executed, and when executed, include one or a combination of the steps of the method embodiments.
可选地, 上述实施例的全部或部分步骤也可以使用集成电路来实现, 这 些步骤可以被分别制作成一个个集成电路模块, 或者将它们中的多个模块或 步骤制作成单个集成电路模块来实现。 这样, 本发明不限制于任何特定的硬 件和软件结合。  Optionally, all or part of the steps of the foregoing embodiments may also be implemented by using an integrated circuit. These steps may be separately fabricated into individual integrated circuit modules, or multiple modules or steps may be fabricated into a single integrated circuit module. achieve. Thus, the invention is not limited to any particular combination of hardware and software.
上述实施例中的各装置 /功能模块 /功能单元可以釆用通用的计算装置来 实现, 它们可以集中在单个的计算装置上, 也可以分布在多个计算装置所组 成的网络上。  The various devices/function modules/functional units in the above embodiments may be implemented using a general-purpose computing device, which may be centralized on a single computing device or distributed over a network of multiple computing devices.
上述实施例中的各装置 /功能模块 /功能单元以软件功能模块的形式实现 并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。 上述提到的计算机可读取存储介质可以是只读存储器, 磁盘或光盘等。  Each device/function module/functional unit in the above embodiments can be stored in a computer readable storage medium when implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as a standalone product. The above mentioned computer readable storage medium may be a read only memory, a magnetic disk or an optical disk or the like.
任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内, 可轻易想 到变化或替换, 都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。 因此, 本发明的保护范 围应以权利要求所述的保护范围为准。  It is to be understood by those skilled in the art that variations or substitutions are within the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present invention should be determined by the scope of the claims.
工业实用性 Industrial applicability
本发明实施例实现了基站和终端更高阶的调制处理, 解决了现有通信系 统无法支持更高阶调制方式的问题。  The embodiments of the present invention implement higher order modulation processing of the base station and the terminal, and solve the problem that the existing communication system cannot support the higher order modulation mode.

Claims

权 利 要 求 书 claims
1、 一种高阶编码调制处理方法, 包括: 1. A high-order coding modulation processing method, including:
基站向终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预定义的资源 集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选 择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M阶调制方式 的增强的信道质量指示(CQI )表和 /或调制编码方案(MCS )表和 /或传输块 大小(TBS )表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调制方式的常规 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表, M≥ 256且为正整数。 The base station sends configuration signaling to the terminal. The configuration signaling indicates that the base station selects an enhancement table that supports the M-order modulation method on a predefined resource set and/or under a predefined transmission mode or chooses not to support the M-order modulation method. The conventional table of The table is a conventional CQI table and/or MCS table and/or TBS table that does not support M-order modulation method, M≥256 and is a positive integer.
2、 根据权利要求 1所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 该方法还包括: 所述基站在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合上, 和 /或对除预定 义传输方式之外的其他传输方式下的终端配置其他信令, 所述其他配置信令 指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常 规表格。 2. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 1, the method further includes: the base station operates on other resource sets except the predefined resource set, and/or performs transmission modes other than the predefined one. The terminal in other transmission modes configures other signaling, and the other configuration signaling indicates whether to select an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or to select a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method.
3、 根据权利要求 1所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述预定义的 资源集合, 包括以下至少之一: 3. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 1, wherein the predefined resource set includes at least one of the following:
预定义的子帧集合, 预定义的频域资源集合, 预定义的下行天线端口集 合, 预定义的传输层数集合。 Predefined subframe set, predefined frequency domain resource set, predefined downlink antenna port set, and predefined transmission layer set.
4、 根据权利要求 3所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述预定义的 子帧集合, 包括以下至少之一: 4. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 3, wherein the predefined subframe set includes at least one of the following:
基站配置的子帧集合, 固定的子帧集合。 The set of subframes configured by the base station, a fixed set of subframes.
5、 根据权利要求 4所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述基站配置 的子帧集合包括以下至少之一: 5. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 4, wherein the subframe set configured by the base station includes at least one of the following:
子帧集合 0 ( subframe set 0 ) , 子帧集合 1 ( subframe set 1 ) , 多播 广播单频网络( MBSFN )子帧, 对于增强的冲突管理业务自适应( elMTA ) , 由系统消息块 1 ( SIB1 ) 配置的下行子帧集合, elMTA中时分双工下行链路 ( TDD DL )子帧中由上行链路(UL )子帧切换而来的下行链路(DL )子帧 集合, 中继(Relay )场景中的回程线路(backhaul )子帧集合, Relay场景中 的接入(Access )子帧集合, 设备对设备 ( D2D )通讯中的 D2D子帧集合。 Subframe set 0 (subframe set 0), subframe set 1 (subframe set 1), multicast broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) subframe, for enhanced conflict management service adaptation (elMTA), by system message block 1 ( SIB1) configured downlink subframe set, the downlink (DL) subframe switched from the uplink (UL) subframe in the time division duplex downlink (TDD DL) subframe in elMTA Set, backhaul subframe set in relay scenario, Access subframe set in Relay scenario, D2D subframe set in device-to-device (D2D) communication.
6、 根据权利要求 4所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述固定的子 帧集合, 包括以下至少之一: 6. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 4, wherein the fixed subframe set includes at least one of the following:
由子帧号《 = 0, 1 , ... ... , 9对应的子帧的一个或者多个构成的子帧集 合, A subframe set consisting of one or more subframes corresponding to subframe numbers = 0, 1, ... ..., 9,
TDD帧结构中的一般子帧, General subframes in TDD frame structure,
TDD帧结构中, 特殊子帧配置 0, 1 , ... ... , 9中的一种或者多种配置的 下行导频时隙 (DwPTS ) 。 In the TDD frame structure, the special subframe configures one or more of the downlink pilot time slots (DwPTS) configured in 0, 1, ..., 9.
7、 根据权利要求 5所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述方法还包 括以下至少之一: 7. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 5, wherein the method further includes at least one of the following:
对于子帧集合 0和子帧集合 1 ,基站分别选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的 增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; For subframe set 0 and subframe set 1, the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method;
对于子帧集合 0,基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 对于子帧集合 1 , 基站选择配置不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格; For subframe set 0, the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method; for subframe set 1, the base station chooses to configure a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method;
对于子帧集合 1 ,基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支 持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 对于子帧集合 0, 基站选择配置不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格; For subframe set 1, the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method; for subframe set 0, the base station chooses to configure a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method;
对于 Relay场景中的 backhaul子帧集合和 Access子帧集合, 基站分别选 择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表 格; For the backhaul subframe set and Access subframe set in the Relay scenario, the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method;
对于 elMTA中 TDD DL子帧中由 UL子帧切换而来的 DL子帧集合和由 系统消息块 1( SIB1 )消息配置的下行子帧集合,基站分别选择配置支持 M 阶 调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。 For the DL subframe set switched from the UL subframe in the TDD DL subframe in elMTA and the downlink subframe set configured by the system message block 1 (SIB1) message, the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or Regular tables for M-order modulation methods are not supported.
8、 根据权利要求 3所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述预定义的 频域资源集合, 包括频谱资源中不被 X2信令指示的可能受相邻基站高度干 扰的资源。 8. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 3, wherein the predefined frequency domain resource set includes spectrum resources that are not indicated by X2 signaling and may be highly interfered by adjacent base stations. disturbing resources.
9、 根据权利要求 2或 3所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 对于由 X2信令指示的可能受相邻基站高度干扰的频率资源, 所述基站 选择配置不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格; 9. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein, for frequency resources indicated by X2 signaling that may be highly interfered by adjacent base stations, the base station selects and configures a frequency resource that does not support the M-order modulation method. Regular forms;
对于除可能受相邻基站高度干扰的频率资源之外的其他频率资源, 所述 基站选择配置支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者不支持 M 阶调制方式的常 规表格。 For frequency resources other than frequency resources that may be highly interfered by adjacent base stations, the base station chooses to configure an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method.
10、 根据权利要求 3所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述预定义 的下行天线端口集合的子集包括以下至少之一: 10. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 3, wherein the subset of the predefined downlink antenna port set includes at least one of the following:
{天线端口 5 } , {天线端口 7至 7 +;? } , {天线端口 8 +;? 至 14 } , {Antenna port 5}, {Antenna port 7 to 7+;?}, {Antenna port 8+;? to 14},
{天线端口 0至 3 } , 其中, p 为正整数, 且 0≤/?≤6。 {Antenna ports 0 to 3}, where p is a positive integer, and 0≤/?≤6.
11、 根据权利要求 3所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述预定义 的传输层数集合为满足 1≤ rank≤ 的所有正整数的集合, 其中, rank为传输 层数, 即所述传输层数集合的元素, L为 M 阶调制方式所支持的最大传输层 数, 且 L为正整数。 11. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 3, wherein the predefined set of transmission layer numbers is a set of all positive integers satisfying 1≤rank≤, where rank is the number of transmission layers, that is, The elements of the transmission layer number set, L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation method, and L is a positive integer.
12、 根据权利要求 3所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述预定义 的传输方式, 包括以下至少之一: 12. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 3, wherein the predefined transmission method includes at least one of the following:
空间复用传输方式; Spatial multiplexing transmission method;
非空间复用传输方式, 至少包括以下之一: Non-spatial multiplexing transmission methods include at least one of the following:
发射分集传输方式, 单天线端口传输方式; Transmit diversity transmission method, single antenna port transmission method;
基于解调参考信号 (DMRS ) 的传输方式; Transmission method based on demodulation reference signal (DMRS);
基于小区专用参考信号 (CRS ) 的传输方式。 Transmission method based on cell-specific reference signal (CRS).
13、 根据权利要求 1所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 基站向终端 发送配置信令的步骤之后, 还包括: 13. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 1, wherein after the base station sends the configuration signaling to the terminal, it further includes:
所述基站接收所述终端的信道状态信息, 所述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 在所述信道状态信息的上行控制信息(UCI )域携带表明所述 CQI基于 增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表的信息。 The base station receives channel state information of the terminal, and the channel state information at least includes CQI, the uplink control information (UCI) field of the channel state information carries information indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a conventional CQI table.
14、 根据权利要求 1或 11或 13所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 当基站选择配置了支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时: 14. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 1 or 11 or 13, wherein when the base station selects and configures an enhanced table that supports M-order modulation mode:
对于传输层数 rank < L, 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表, 其中 L为 M 阶 调制方式所支持的最大传输层数, 且 L为正整数; For the number of transmission layers rank < L, the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table, where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation method, and L is a positive integer;
对于 rank > L, 所述 CQI基于常规 CQI表。 For rank > L, the CQI is based on the regular CQI table.
15、 根据权利要求 13所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 15. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 13, wherein,
当所述基站通过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格, 且终端上报两个传输块的 CQI时, 所述两个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 CQI 表, 或所述两个传输块中仅有一个传输块的 CQI基于增强的 CQI表。 When the base station indicates through the configuration signaling that it selects an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method, and the terminal reports the CQIs of two transport blocks, the CQIs of the two transport blocks are based on the enhanced CQI table, or the The CQI of only one of the two transport blocks is based on the enhanced CQI table.
16、 根据权利要求 13所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 所述基站通 过所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时, 对于周期上报 CSI, 该方法至少包括以下之一: 16. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 13, wherein when the base station indicates through the configuration signaling to select an enhancement table that supports M-order modulation mode, for periodic reporting of CSI, the method at least includes the following: one:
当传输层数 rank = 1时, 终端上报 CQI时通过上行控制信息 ( UCI )域 的 1比特通知基站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表; When the number of transmission layers rank = 1, when the terminal reports CQI, it notifies the base station that the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table through 1 bit of the uplink control information (UCI) field;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 终端上报 CQI时通过第二个传输块差分 CQI的 1比特通知基站第一个和 /或第二个传输块的所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是 常规 CQI表, 所述第二个传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示; When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, when the terminal reports CQI, it uses 1 bit of the differential CQI of the second transport block to inform the base station whether the CQI of the first and/or second transport block is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table. , the second transport block is represented by 2-bit differential CQI;
当传输层数 rank > 1时,对于只上报 CQI而不上报预编码矩阵指示( PMI ) 的物理上行链路控制信道(PUCCH )上艮类型, 终端上报 CQI 时通过 UCI 域新增的 1比特通知基站,第一个传输块所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常 规 CQI表, When the number of transmission layers rank > 1, for the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) type that only reports CQI without reporting precoding matrix indication (PMI), the terminal reports the CQI through the 1-bit new addition in the UCI field. Base station, whether the CQI in the first transmission block is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table,
和 /或所述终端通过 UCI域新增的另一比特通知基站所述第二个传输块 所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表; And/or the terminal notifies the base station of the second transmission block through another bit added in the UCI domain whether the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table;
终端通过信道状态信息的预编码类型指示(PTI )域通知基站, 所述 CQI 基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI表; 当传输层数 rank = 1时,所述增强的 CQI表为 5比特 CQI表,且所述 CQI 釆用 5比特表示; The terminal notifies the base station through the precoding type indication (PTI) field of the channel state information whether the CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table; When the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the enhanced CQI table is a 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI is represented by 5 bits;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个或两个传输块的 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 第一个传输块的 CQI用 5 比特表示; 第二个传输块用 2比特差分 CQI表示; When the number of transport layers rank > 1, the CQI of the first or two transport blocks is based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table. The CQI of the first transport block is represented by 5 bits; the second transport block is represented by 2-bit differential CQI. ;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5 比特 CQI表, 两个传输块的 CQI釆用 7比特联合上报, 即 7个比特所能表示 的 27种情况中的任何一种都指示了两个传输块 CQI的一种组合; When the number of transport layers rank > 1, the CQIs of the first and second transport blocks are both based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table. The CQIs of the two transport blocks are reported jointly using 7 bits, that is, the CQIs of the two transport blocks can be represented by 7 bits. 2 Any of the 7 cases indicates a combination of two transport block CQIs;
当传输层数 rank > 1时, 对于只上报 CQI而不上报 PMI的 PUCCH上报 类型, 第一个和第二个传输块的 CQI都基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 第一个传 输块的 CQI用 5比特表示, 第二个传输块的 CQI用 4比特差分 CQI表示; 终端通过信道状态信息的 PTI域通知基站, 所述 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表中的集合 A和 B,所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 5比特 CQI表中 的等级, A和 B互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 5比特 CQI表。 When the number of transport layers rank > 1, for the PUCCH reporting type that only reports CQI but not PMI, the CQI of the first and second transport blocks are based on the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and the CQI of the first transport block is 5-bit representation, the CQI of the second transport block is represented by 4-bit differential CQI; the terminal notifies the base station through the PTI field of the channel state information, the CQI is based on sets A and B in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, and the set A Or the elements of B come from the levels in the enhanced 5-bit CQI table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and the union of A and B is the entire enhanced 5-bit CQI table.
17、 根据权利要求 13所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 当所述基站 通过配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时, 对于非周期上报 CSI, 该方法至少包括以下之一: 17. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 13, wherein when the base station indicates through configuration signaling that it selects an enhanced table that supports M-order modulation, for aperiodic reporting of CSI, the method at least includes the following: one:
新增 1 比特用于通知基站, 宽带 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI 表; A new bit is added to inform the base station whether the broadband CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table;
新增 1 比特用于通知基站, 子带 CQI基于增强的 CQI表还是常规 CQI 表; A new bit is added to inform the base station whether the subband CQI is based on the enhanced CQI table or the conventional CQI table;
宽带 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 且釆用 5比特表示; Broadband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table and is represented by 5 bits;
子带 CQI基于增强的 5比特 CQI表, 且釆用 X个比特表示, 所述 X > 3 且为正整数。 The subband CQI is based on an enhanced 5-bit CQI table and is represented by X bits, where X > 3 and is a positive integer.
18、 根据权利要求 1所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中于, 基站在预 定义的资源集合上, 和 /或对预定义传输方式下的终端配置信令的步骤之后还 包括: 所述基站向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下行控制信令至少包括调 制和编码方式域(/MCS ) , 通过所述下行控制信令的下行控制信息(DCI )域 或者小区无线网络临时标识 (C-RNTI )通知所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表, 所述 DCI域至少包括以下之一: 18. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 1, wherein after the step of configuring signaling to the terminal in the predefined transmission mode by the base station on a predefined resource set, it further includes: The base station sends downlink control signaling to the terminal. The downlink control signaling at least includes a modulation and coding scheme field (/ MCS ), through the downlink control information (DCI) field of the downlink control signaling or the cell wireless network. The temporary identifier (C-RNTI) notifies the terminal that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, and the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
新数据指示 ( New data indicator ) 域, 导频质量指示 (PQI ) , 冗余 版本域, 发射功率控制 (TPC )命令。 New data indicator field, pilot quality indicator (PQI), redundancy version field, transmit power control (TPC) command.
19、 根据权利要求 11或 18所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 当基 站配置选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时, 对于传输层数 rank≤L, 所述 IMCS基于增强的 MCS表, 其中 L为 M 阶调制方式所支持的最大传输层数, 且 L为正整数; 对于 rank > L, 所述 IMCS基于常规 MCS表。 19. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 11 or 18, wherein when the base station configuration selects an enhanced table that supports M-order modulation mode, for the number of transmission layers rank≤L, the IMCS is based on the enhanced MCS table , where L is the maximum number of transmission layers supported by the M-order modulation method, and L is a positive integer; for rank > L, the IMCS is based on the conventional MCS table.
20、 根据权利要求 18所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 当基站通过 所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时,该方法还至少包括 以下之一: 20. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 18, wherein when the base station indicates through the configuration signaling to select an enhancement table that supports the M-order modulation method, the method further includes at least one of the following:
对于两个传输块的下行传输, 两个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 MCS表; 对于两个传输块的下行传输, 一个传输块的 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表, 另一个传输块的 /MCS基于常规 MCS表; For the downlink transmission of two transport blocks, the / MCS of both transport blocks are based on the enhanced MCS table; for the downlink transmission of two transport blocks, the / MCS of one transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table, and the /MCS of the other transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table. MCS is based on conventional MCS tables;
对于单个传输块的下行传输, 该传输块的 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或者 常规 MCS表。 For the downlink transmission of a single transport block, the / MCS of the transport block is based on the enhanced MCS table or the conventional MCS table.
21、 根据权利要求 18所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 当所述基站 根据所述配置信令表明选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格时,该方法还至少 包括以下之一: 21. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 18, wherein when the base station indicates that it selects an enhancement table that supports M-order modulation according to the configuration signaling, the method further includes at least one of the following:
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank = 1时, 所述基站通 过第二个传输块新数据指示域通知所述终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还 是常规 MCS表; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transmission layers rank = 1, the base station notifies the terminal through the second transmission block new data indication field that the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the conventional MCS table;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 所述基站通 过第 ,个传输块调制和编码方式域中 1比特通知所述终端第 ,个传输块和 /或 另一个传输块所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 第 I个传输块 的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特作为相对于另一个传输块的差分 /MCS, 即第 I 个传输块的 /MCS用另一个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS求和得到; ζ· =2或者 1; 当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 所述基站通 过第 ,个传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特通知所述终端第 ,个传输块或两个传输 块所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 第 I个传输块冗余版本域 中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本, , =1或者 2; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station notifies the terminal of the th transport block and/or another transmission through 1 bit in the modulation and coding mode field of the th transport block. The block/ MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the conventional MCS table, the 1st transport block The remaining 4 bits in the modulation and coding mode field are used as the differential / MCS relative to another transport block, that is, the / MCS of the I-th transport block is obtained by summing the / MCS of another transport block and the differential / MCS ; ζ· =2 Or 1; when the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the base station notifies the terminal of the th transmission block or two transmissions through 1 bit in the redundancy version field of the th transmission block. The block/ MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the conventional MCS table. Another 1 bit in the redundancy version field of the I-th transport block is used to indicate two redundancy versions, , =1 or 2;
对于 DCI format 2D, 所述基站使用 PQI通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 高层在现有 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set中配置指示增强的 MCS表或者常规 MCS表, 或者 PQI仅 用于指示增强的 MCS表或者常规 MCS表而不再指示 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; For DCI format 2D, the base station uses PQI to inform the terminal whether the MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table or the conventional MCS table. The upper layer configures the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI to indicate the enhanced MCS table or conventional MCS. table, or PQI is only used to indicate the enhanced MCS table or conventional MCS table and no longer indicates PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
所述基站使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表还是常规 MCS表, 具体地, TPC命令在指示 TPC的同时也指示增强的 MCS表或者常 规 MCS表; The base station uses a TPC command to inform the terminal whether the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table. Specifically, the TPC command indicates TPC while also indicating an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank = 1时, 单个传输块 的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由第二个传 输块新数据指示 ( New data indicator ) 域的 1比特和第一个传输块调制和 编码方式 i或的 5比特组成; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transport layers rank = 1, the /MCS of a single transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits, which are indicated by the new data of the second transport block ( New data indicator ) field is composed of 1 bit and 5 bits of the first transport block modulation and coding method i or;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第 个传输 块的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由另一个 传输块调制和编码方式域中 1比特和第 ,个传输块调制和编码方式域的 5比 特组成, 另一个传输块的调制和编码方式域剩余 4比特作为相对于第 ,个传 输块的差分 /MCS, 即另一个传输块的 /MCS用第 I个传输块的 /MCS与差分 /MCS 求和得到; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transport layers rank > 1, the / MCS of the transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits. The 6 bits are modulated and encoded by another transport block. The remaining 4 bits of the modulation and coding mode field of another transport block are used as the difference/ MCS relative to the ,th transport block, that is, another transmission The / MCS of the block is obtained by summing the / MCS of the I-th transmission block and the differential / MCS ;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第一个和第 二个传输块的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 两个传输块的 /MCS釆用 10 比特联合上报, 即 10个比特所能表示的 2的 10次方种情况中的任何一种都 指示了两个传输块 /MCS的一种组合; 当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 第 个传输 块的 /MCS基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 该 6比特由第 I个 传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特联合调制和编码方式域的 5比特组成, 第 ,个传 输块冗余版本域中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本, , =1或者 2; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transport layers rank > 1, the / MCS of the first and second transport blocks are both based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, and the / MCS of the two transport blocks use 10 bits. Joint reporting, that is, any of the 10 cases of 2 that can be represented by 10 bits indicates a combination of two transport blocks/ MCS ; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X and the number of transmission layers rank > 1, the /MCS of the 1st transport block is based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and is represented by 6 bits. The 6 bits are represented by the redundant version of the 1st transport block. The 1-bit joint modulation and coding mode field in the field is composed of 5 bits. The other 1 bit in the redundant version field of the ,th transport block is used to indicate two redundant versions, , =1 or 2;
当 DCI format为 DCI format 2或 2X, 传输层数 rank > 1时, 两个传输块 的 /MCS都基于增强的 6 比特 MCS表, 并用 6比特表示, 对于两个传输块, 该 6比特都由第 I个传输块冗余版本域中 1 比特联合调制和编码方式域的 5 比特组成,第 z个传输块冗余版本域中另外 1比特用于指示两个冗余版本; 1 =1 或者 2; When the DCI format is DCI format 2 or 2X, and the number of transport layers rank > 1, the /MCS of both transport blocks are based on the enhanced 6-bit MCS table and are represented by 6 bits. For both transport blocks, the 6 bits are represented by The 1-bit joint modulation and coding mode field in the I-th transport block redundancy version field is composed of 5 bits, and the other 1 bit in the z-th transport block redundancy version field is used to indicate two redundancy versions; 1 =1 or 2 ;
对于 DCI format 2D, 使用 PQI通知终端, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特 For DCI format 2D, use PQI to inform the terminal that the / MCS is based on enhanced 6-bit
MCS表中的集合 A或者 B, 所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 6比特 MCS 表中的等级, A和 B互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 6比特 MCS表, 由高层在现有 PQI对应的 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set中配置指 示集合 A或者 B,或者 PQI仅用于指示集合 A或者 B而不再指示 PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set; Set A or B in the MCS table, the elements of the set A or B come from the levels in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table, A and B are mutually exclusive, and the union of A and B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table, The higher layer configures the indication set A or B in the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set corresponding to the existing PQI, or the PQI is only used to indicate the set A or B and no longer indicates the PDSCH RE mapping and QCL parameter set;
使用 TPC命令通知终端所述 /MCS基于增强的 6比特 MCS表中的集合 A 或者 B,所述集合 A或 B的元素来自增强的 6比特 MCS表中的等级, A和 B 互斥, 且 A和 B的并即是整个增强的 6比特 MCS表, 具体地, TPC命令在 指示 TPC的同时也指示集合 A或者 B; 扰时所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表, 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI加或减 j对 PDCCH的 CRC进行加扰时所述 /MCS基于常规的 MCS表,其中, j为正整数; 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI对 PDCCH的 CRC进行加扰时, 所述 /MCS基 于常规的 MCS表; 当使用预先配置的 C-RNTI加或减 j对 PDCCH的 CRC进 行加扰时, 所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表。 Use a TPC command to notify the terminal that the / MCS is based on set A or B in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table. The elements of the set A or B come from the levels in the enhanced 6-bit MCS table. A and B are mutually exclusive, and A The union of B and B is the entire enhanced 6-bit MCS table. Specifically, the TPC command indicates TPC while also indicating set A or B; the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table when scrambling, when using the pre-configured C- When the RNTI adds or subtracts j to scramble the CRC of the PDCCH, the / MCS is based on the conventional MCS table, where j is a positive integer; when the preconfigured C-RNTI is used to scramble the CRC of the PDCCH, the / The MCS is based on the conventional MCS table; when the CRC of the PDCCH is scrambled using the preconfigured C-RNTI plus or minus j, the / MCS is based on the enhanced MCS table.
22、 一种高阶编码调制处理方法, 包括: 22. A high-order coding modulation processing method, including:
终端接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信令, 所述配置信令表明在预 定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义的传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增 强表格或者指示选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格 , M≥ 256且为正整数。 The terminal receives the downlink data and obtains the configuration signaling sent by the base station. The configuration signaling indicates that the M-order modulation method is selected to support the increase in the predefined resource set and/or in the predefined transmission mode. A strong table or a regular table indicating that selection does not support M-order modulation, M≥ 256 and is a positive integer.
23、 根据权利要求 22所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 终端接收下 行数据, 获取基站在预定义的资源集合上, 和 /或对于预定义的传输方式给终 端配置的信令的步骤之后还包括: 23. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 22, wherein the terminal receives downlink data, obtains the base station on a predefined resource set, and/or configures signaling for the terminal for a predefined transmission mode. Also includes:
所述终端向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所述信道状态信息至少包括信 道质量指示(CQI ) , 所述终端通过信道状态信息的上行控制信息(UCI )域 通知基站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表。 The terminal sends channel status information to the base station. The channel status information at least includes a channel quality indication (CQI). The terminal notifies the base station that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI through the uplink control information (UCI) field of the channel status information. table or regular CQI table.
24、 根据权利要求 22所述的高阶编码调制处理方法, 其中, 终端接收下 行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信令的步骤之后还包括: 24. The high-order coding modulation processing method according to claim 22, wherein the step of the terminal receiving downlink data and obtaining the configuration signaling sent by the base station further includes:
所述终端接收所述基站发送的下行控制信令, 所述下行控制信令至少包 括调制和编码方式域(/MCS ) , 所述终端通过所述下行控制信令的下行控制 信息 (DCI )域或者小区无线网络临时标识(C-RNTI )得知所述 /MCS基于增 强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表, 所述 DCI域至少包括以下之一: The terminal receives the downlink control signaling sent by the base station. The downlink control signaling at least includes a modulation and coding scheme field (/ MCS ). The terminal receives the downlink control information (DCI) field of the downlink control signaling through the downlink control information (DCI) field. Or the Cell Radio Network Temporary Identity (C-RNTI) learns that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table, and the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
新数据指示域,导频质量指示( PQI ) ,冗余版本域,发射功率控制 ( TPC ) 命令。 New data indication field, pilot quality indication (PQI), redundancy version field, transmit power control (TPC) command.
25、 一种高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置包括: 25. A high-order coding modulation processing device, which includes:
第一配置模块, 其设置为: 向终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所 述基站在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制 方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格,所述增强表格即 为支持 M 阶调制方式的增强的信道质量指示 (CQI )表和 /或调制编码方案 ( MCS )表和 /或传输块大小 ( TBS )表, 所述的常规表格即为不支持 M阶调 The first configuration module is configured to: send configuration signaling to the terminal, the configuration signaling indicating that the base station selects an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. Or select a conventional table that does not support the M-order modulation method. The enhanced table is an enhanced channel quality indication (CQI) table and/or a modulation coding scheme (MCS) table and/or a transport block size (TCS) table that supports the M-order modulation method. TBS ) table, the conventional table does not support M-scale tone
26、 根据权利要求 25所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置还包括: 第二配置模块, 其设置为: 在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合 所述其他配置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格。 26. The high-order coding and modulation processing device according to claim 25, the device further comprising: a second configuration module configured to: indicate other configuration signaling in other resource sets other than the predefined resource set. Select the enhanced table that supports M-order modulation method or select the regular table that does not support M-order modulation method.
27、 根据权利要求 25所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置还包括: 信道状态信息接收模块, 其设置为: 接收所述终端的信道状态信息, 所 述信道状态信息至少包括 CQI, 在所述信道状态信息的 UCI域携带表明所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或常规 CQI表的信息。 27. The high-order coding modulation processing device according to claim 25, the device further comprising: a channel state information receiving module, which is configured to: receive channel state information of the terminal, where the channel state information at least includes CQI, The UCI field of the channel state information carries information indicating that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a conventional CQI table.
28、 根据权利要求 25所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置还包括: 控制信令下发模块, 其设置为: 向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下 行控制信令至少包括调制和编码方式域(/MCS ) , 通过所述下行控制信令的 下行控制信息 (DCI )域或者小区无线网络临时标识(C-RNTI )通知所述终 端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括以下之 一: 28. The high-order coding and modulation processing device according to claim 25, the device further comprising: a control signaling sending module, which is configured to: send downlink control signaling to the terminal, the downlink control signaling at least includes: The modulation and coding scheme field (/ MCS ) notifies the terminal that the / MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or For regular MCS tables, the DCI domain includes at least one of the following:
New data indicator域, 导频质量指示 ( PQI ) , 冗余版本域, 发射功率 控制 ( TPC )命令。 New data indicator field, pilot quality indicator (PQI), redundancy version field, transmit power control (TPC) command.
29、 一种高阶编码调制处理装置, 包括: 29. A high-order coding and modulation processing device, including:
配置信令获取模块, 其设置为: 接收下行数据, 获取基站发送的配置信 令, 所述配置信令表明在预定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义的传输方式下选 择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者指示选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规 表格, M≥ 256且为正整数。 A configuration signaling acquisition module, which is configured to: receive downlink data, and acquire configuration signaling sent by the base station. The configuration signaling indicates that M-order modulation is selected to be supported on a predefined resource set and/or in a predefined transmission mode. Enhanced table of the mode or a regular table indicating that the M-order modulation mode is not supported, M ≥ 256 and is a positive integer.
30、 根据权利要求 29所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置还包括: 信道状态信息发送模块, 其设置为: 向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所 述信道状态信息至少包括信道质量指示 (CQI ) , 通过所述信道状态信息的 上行控制信息 (UCI )域通知所述基站所述 CQI基于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表。 30. The high-order coding modulation processing device according to claim 29, the device further comprising: a channel state information sending module, which is configured to: send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information at least includes a channel quality indication (CQI), the base station is informed through the uplink control information (UCI) field of the channel state information that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI table.
31、 根据权利要求 29所述的高阶编码调制处理装置, 该装置还包括: 控制信令接收模块, 其设置为: 接收所述基站发送的下行控制信令, 所 述下行控制信令至少包括调制和编码方式域(/MCS ) , 通过所述下行控制信 令的下行控制信息 (DCI )域或者小区无线网络临时标识(C-RNTI )得知所 述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表, 所述 DCI域至少包括以下之一: 数据指示域,导频质量指示( PQI ) ,冗余版本域,发射功率控制( TPC ) 31. The high-order coding and modulation processing device according to claim 29, the device further comprising: a control signaling receiving module, which is configured to: receive downlink control signaling sent by the base station, the downlink control signaling at least includes: Modulation and coding scheme field (/ MCS ), the /MCS is known based on the enhanced MCS table or conventional MCS through the downlink control information (DCI) field of the downlink control signaling or the Cell Radio Network Temporary Identity (C-RNTI) table, the DCI domain includes at least one of the following: Data indication field, pilot quality indication (PQI), redundancy version field, transmit power control (TPC)
32、 一种高阶编码调制处理系统, 包括基站和终端; 32. A high-order coding and modulation processing system, including a base station and a terminal;
所述基站, 包括如权利要求 25至 28中任一项所述的高阶编码调制处理 装置, 设置为: 向所述终端发送配置信令, 所述配置信令表明所述基站在预 定义的资源集合上和 /或在预定义传输方式下选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强 表格或者选择不支持 M 阶调制方式的常规表格, 所述增强表格即为支持 M 阶调制方式的增强的 CQI表和 /或 MCS表和 /或 TBS表,所述的常规表格即为 为正整数; The base station, including the high-order coding and modulation processing device according to any one of claims 25 to 28, is configured to: send configuration signaling to the terminal, where the configuration signaling indicates that the base station predefined On the resource set and/or in the predefined transmission mode, select an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or select a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method. The enhanced table is an enhanced CQI table that supports the M-order modulation method and /or MCS table and/or TBS table, the conventional table is a positive integer;
所述终端, 包括如权利要求 29至 31中任一项所述的高阶编码调制处理 装置, 设置为接收下行数据, 获取所述基站发送的所述配置信令。 The terminal, including the high-order coding modulation processing device according to any one of claims 29 to 31, is configured to receive downlink data and obtain the configuration signaling sent by the base station.
33、 根据权利要求 32所述的高阶编码调制处理系统, 其中, 33. The high-order coding modulation processing system according to claim 32, wherein,
所述基站, 还设置为: 在除预定义的资源集合之外的其他资源集合上, 其他配置信令指示选择支持 M 阶调制方式的增强表格或者选择不支持 M 阶 调制方式的常规表格。 The base station is further configured to: on resource sets other than the predefined resource set, other configuration signaling indicates selecting an enhanced table that supports the M-order modulation method or selecting a regular table that does not support the M-order modulation method.
34、 根据权利要求 32所述的高阶编码调制处理系统, 其中, 34. The high-order coding modulation processing system according to claim 32, wherein,
所述终端, 还设置为: 向所述基站发送信道状态信息, 所述信道状态信 息至少包括 CQI,通过所述信道状态信息的 UCI域通知所述基站所述 CQI基 于增强的 CQI表或者常规 CQI表; The terminal is further configured to: send channel state information to the base station, where the channel state information at least includes CQI, and notify the base station that the CQI is based on an enhanced CQI table or a regular CQI through the UCI field of the channel state information. surface;
所述基站, 还设置为: 接收所述终端发送的信道状态信息。 The base station is further configured to: receive channel state information sent by the terminal.
35、 根据权利要求 32所述的高阶编码调制处理系统, 其中, 35. The high-order coding modulation processing system according to claim 32, wherein,
所述基站, 还设置为: 向所述终端发送下行控制信令, 所述下行控制信 令至少包括 /MCS, 通过所述下行控制信令的 DCI域或者 C-RNTI通知所述终 端所述 /MCS基于增强的 MCS表或常规 MCS表,所述 DCI域至少包括以下之 New data indicator域, PQI, 冗余版本域, TPC命令; The base station is further configured to: send downlink control signaling to the terminal, where the downlink control signaling at least includes / MCS , and notify the terminal of the /MCS through the DCI domain or C-RNTI of the downlink control signaling. MCS is based on an enhanced MCS table or a conventional MCS table. The DCI domain at least includes the following: New data indicator field, PQI, redundant version field, TPC command;
所述终端, 还设置为接收所述下行控制信令。 The terminal is further configured to receive the downlink control signaling.
36、 一种计算机程序, 包括程序指令, 当该程序指令被基站执行时, 使 得该基站可执行权利要求 1-21任一项所述的方法。 36. A computer program, including program instructions. When the program instructions are executed by a base station, the base station can execute the method described in any one of claims 1-21.
37、 一种载有权利要求 36所述计算机程序的载体。 37. A carrier carrying the computer program of claim 36.
38、 一种计算机程序, 包括程序指令, 当该程序指令被终端执行时, 使 得该终端可执行权利要求 22-24任一项所述的方法。 38. A computer program, including program instructions. When the program instructions are executed by a terminal, the terminal can execute the method described in any one of claims 22-24.
39、 一种载有权利要求 38所述计算机程序的载体。 39. A carrier carrying the computer program of claim 38.
PCT/CN2014/000617 2013-12-31 2014-06-24 Higher-order coding processing method, apparatus and system WO2015100690A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201310754167.2 2013-12-31
CN201310754167.2A CN104753633B (en) 2013-12-31 2013-12-31 High-order code processing method, device and system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015100690A1 true WO2015100690A1 (en) 2015-07-09

Family

ID=53493018

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2014/000617 WO2015100690A1 (en) 2013-12-31 2014-06-24 Higher-order coding processing method, apparatus and system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN104753633B (en)
WO (1) WO2015100690A1 (en)

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019080837A1 (en) * 2017-10-23 2019-05-02 Mediatek Inc. Configuration and selection of pucch resource set
CN110061804A (en) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-26 华为技术有限公司 A kind of communication, the reception of MCS, notification method and equipment
US10708112B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2020-07-07 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Dynamic indication of higher order modulation and coding scheme table
US11362758B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2022-06-14 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Communication method and communications device
US11432279B2 (en) * 2018-04-13 2022-08-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting transport block by using downlink control information in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
US11569930B2 (en) 2018-01-18 2023-01-31 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for sending modulation and coding scheme (MCS)

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017049632A1 (en) * 2015-09-25 2017-03-30 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and apparatus
CN108024274B (en) * 2016-11-04 2021-06-15 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication data transmission method, device and system
BR112019013854A2 (en) * 2017-01-05 2020-01-28 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
CN108462552B (en) * 2017-02-17 2022-04-12 华为技术有限公司 Multi-code-word transmission method and device
KR20200052901A (en) 2017-09-13 2020-05-15 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 Data processing method, terminal device and network device
CN109586872B (en) 2017-09-29 2022-01-14 华为技术有限公司 Method for reporting channel quality information, terminal equipment and network equipment
CN109787711B (en) * 2017-11-15 2021-08-17 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 MCS index table configuration method, user terminal and network side equipment
US10742379B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2020-08-11 Mediatek Inc. Uplink control information handling for new radio
TWI786259B (en) * 2018-01-24 2022-12-11 大陸商Oppo廣東移動通信有限公司 Data transmission method, device, and computer readable medium
US10925047B2 (en) * 2018-02-07 2021-02-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Systems and methods for scheduling wireless communications
CN113242108B (en) * 2018-02-12 2023-04-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data communication processing method and device
WO2020000422A1 (en) * 2018-06-29 2020-01-02 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Method and device for transmitting downlink control information
CN110855414B (en) * 2019-11-18 2021-11-26 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 Downlink decoding method, device, user equipment and storage medium
CN111901273A (en) * 2020-01-17 2020-11-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Modulation coding method, device, equipment and storage medium

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101674149A (en) * 2008-09-08 2010-03-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Adaptive code modulation method
CN102752082A (en) * 2011-04-22 2012-10-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Multi-antenna data sending method and system
CN102752073A (en) * 2011-04-21 2012-10-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data sending method and system
US20130033989A1 (en) * 2011-08-03 2013-02-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Enhanced downlink rate adaptation for lte heterogeneous network base stations

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101674149A (en) * 2008-09-08 2010-03-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Adaptive code modulation method
CN102752073A (en) * 2011-04-21 2012-10-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data sending method and system
CN102752082A (en) * 2011-04-22 2012-10-24 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Multi-antenna data sending method and system
US20130033989A1 (en) * 2011-08-03 2013-02-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Enhanced downlink rate adaptation for lte heterogeneous network base stations

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2019080837A1 (en) * 2017-10-23 2019-05-02 Mediatek Inc. Configuration and selection of pucch resource set
US10708112B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2020-07-07 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Dynamic indication of higher order modulation and coding scheme table
US11184211B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2021-11-23 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Dynamic indication of higher order modulation and coding scheme table
US11362758B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2022-06-14 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Communication method and communications device
US11641302B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2023-05-02 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Dynamic indication of higher order modulation and coding scheme table
US11569930B2 (en) 2018-01-18 2023-01-31 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for sending modulation and coding scheme (MCS)
CN110061804A (en) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-26 华为技术有限公司 A kind of communication, the reception of MCS, notification method and equipment
CN110061804B (en) * 2018-01-19 2021-01-29 华为技术有限公司 Communication, MCS receiving and notifying method and equipment
US11705981B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2023-07-18 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Communication method, MCS receiving method, MCS notification method, and device
US11432279B2 (en) * 2018-04-13 2022-08-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting transport block by using downlink control information in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN104753633A (en) 2015-07-01
CN104753633B (en) 2019-06-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2015100690A1 (en) Higher-order coding processing method, apparatus and system
US20200366448A1 (en) System and method for link adaptation for low cost user equipments
US11122645B2 (en) Systems and methods for constellation superposition
US11736170B2 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
KR101891131B1 (en) Modulation processing method and apparatus for high-order coding, base station, and terminal
US9197385B2 (en) Systems and methods for demodulation reference signal selection
JP6456514B2 (en) Base station, terminal, reception method and transmission method
AU2022204501A1 (en) Method and apparatus for multiplexing channel state information
KR101943174B1 (en) Non-orthogonal multiple access(noma) wireless systems and methods
KR20170017531A (en) Method and apparatus for radio link monitoring in wireless communcation system
EP3499758B1 (en) Transmitting method and device and receiving method and device for transport block
EP3793251A1 (en) Terminal device and base station device
CN115398831A (en) Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) adaptation in full duplex mode
CN115398832B (en) Time interleaving of code block groups in full duplex mode
US11444721B2 (en) Data segmentation method, apparatus, and terminal
US20210329614A1 (en) Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving control information in communication system
EP3791525A1 (en) Cqi codepoint reinterpretation
KR20220021835A (en) Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving control information and data in communication system
CN117527010A (en) Base station and user equipment for performing mimo communication and operating method thereof
KR20210038270A (en) A phase tracking method and apparatus for sidelink communication in wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14876006

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14876006

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1